Operation/Programming 11/2002 Edition

sinumerik
ShopMill
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
 Introduction 1

Operation 2

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming with 3

ShopMill

ShopMill Programming with 4

G Code

Simulation 5
Operation/Programming

File Management 6

Alarms and Messages 7

Examples 8

Appendix A

Valid for

Control Software version

SINUMERIK 840D 6
SINUMERIK 840DE (export version) 6
SINUMERIK 840D powerline 6
SINUMERIK 840DE powerline 6
SINUMERIK 840Di 2
SINUMERIK 840DiE (export version) 2
SINUMERIK 810D powerline 6
SINUMERIK 810DE powerline 6

11.02 Edition
SINUMERIK® Documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column.

Status codes in the "Remarks" column:

A .... New documentation.

B .... Unrevised edition with new Order No.
C .... Revised edition with new status.

Edition Order No. Comment

10.97 6FC5298-2AD10-0BP0 A
11.98 6FC5298-2AD10-0BP1 C
03.99 6FC5298-5AD10-0BP0 C
08.00 6FC5298-5AD10-0BP1 C
12.01 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP0 C
11.02 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP1 C

This book is part of the documentation available on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)

Edition Order No. Comment
11.02 6FC5298-6CA00-0BG3 C

Trademarks
® ® ® ® ® ®
SIMATIC , SIMATIC HMI , SIMATIC NET , SIROTEC , SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE are trademarks of
Siemens AG. Other product names in this documentation may be trademarks which, if used by third parties,
could infringe the rights of their owners.

Further information is available on the Internet under: Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the
http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.

This publication was produced with WinWord V8.0 We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware
and Designer V6.0. and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist and we cannot
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not therefore guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will
All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model be included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.
or design, are reserved.

© Siemens AG, 1997–2002. All rights reserved Subject to change without prior notice

Order No. 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP1 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Printed in Germany
 0 0
11.02 Preface

Preface
Structure of the The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:
documentation • General Documentation
• User Documentation
• Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Target group This documentation is intended for use by operators of vertical

machining centers or universal milling machines controlled by the
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D system.

Validity This Operator's/Programming Guide is valid for ShopMill SW 6.3 with

• SINUMERIK 810D (SW 6.3 and later)
• SINUMERIK 840D (SW 6.3 and later)
• SINUMERIK 840Di (SW 2.2 and later)

Hotline Please address any queries to the following hotline:

A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
Email: adsupport@siemens.com

If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) concerning the

documentation, please send them to the following fax number or email
address:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98-2176
Fax form at the end of the documentation
Email: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de

Internet address http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik

SINUMERIK 840D As of 09.2001, improved-performance variants SINUMERIK 840D

powerline powerline and SINUMERIK 840DE powerline are available. For a list
of available powerline modules, please refer to the following Hardware
Description:
Reference: /PHD/, SINUMERIK 840D Configuration Manual

SINUMERIK 810D As of 12.2001, improved-performance variants SINUMERIK 810D

powerline powerline and SINUMERIK 810DE powerline are available from. For a
list of available powerline modules, please refer to the following
Hardware Description:
Reference: /PHC/, SINUMERIK 810D Configuration Manual

Standard scope This Operator's/Programming Guide describes the functionality of the

ShopMill operator interface. Extensions or changes made by the
machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool
manufacturer.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 0-5
 0 0
Preface 11.02

More detailed information about other publications relating to

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D and publications that apply to all
SINUMERIK controls (e.g. Universal Interface, Measuring Cycles...)
can be obtained from your local Siemens branch office.

Other functions not described in this documentation might be

executable in the control. This does not, however, represent as
obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.

Principle Your SIEMENS 840D/840Di/810D with ShopMill has been designed

and constructed according to state-of-the-art technology and approved
safety regulations and standards.

Additional equipment SIEMENS offers special add-on equipment, products and system
configurations for the focused expansion of SIEMENS controls in your
field of application.

Personnel Only suitably trained, authorized, reliable personnel should be

allowed to handle the equipment. Persons who are not qualified
should never be allowed to work on the control, even for a short time.

The relevant responsibilities of personnel who set up, operate and

maintain the equipment must be clearly defined and adherence to
these responsibilities monitored.

Procedure Before the control is started up, it should be ensured that the
Operator's Guides have been read and understood by the people
responsible. The operator also has a permanent obligation to
continuously monitor the overall technical condition (externally
recognizable defects and damage and changes in the operating
behavior) of the control.

Servicing Repairs must be carried out by personnel who are specially trained
and qualified in the relevant technical subject according to the
information supplied in the service and maintenance guide. All
appropriate safety specifications must be observed.

The following is deemed to be improper usage and exempts the

manufacturer from any liability:
• Any application deviating from the above points or usage
extending beyond the given limits.
• Cases where the control is not maintained in perfect technical
condition, or is operated without due regard to safety or danger,
and cases where any or all of the instructions in the Operator's
Guide have not been observed.
• If faults that might affect the safety of the equipment are not

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

0-6 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 0 0
11.02 Preface

rectified before the control is started up.

• Any modification, bypassing or disabling of items of equipment
on the control that are required to ensure fault-free operation,
unlimited use and active and passive safety.

Improper usage gives rise to unforeseen dangers to

• life and limb of personnel,
• the control, machine or other assets of the owner and the user.

Structure of the This documentation uses the following information blocks, identified by
documentation pictograms:

Function

Operating sequence

Explanation of parameters

Additional notes

Software option
The function described is a software option. This means that the
function will only run on the control if you have purchased the relevant
option.

Warnings The following 5 warnings with varying degrees of severity are used in
this documentation.

Danger
This symbol indicates that death, grievous injury or substantial
property damage will occur if the appropriate precautions are not
taken.

Warning
This symbol indicates that death, grievous injury or substantial
property damage may occur if the appropriate precautions are not
taken.

Caution
This symbol indicates that minor injuries or property damage may
occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 0-7
 0 0
Preface 11.02

Caution
This warning (without a warning triangle) indicates that property
damage may occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

Attention
This warning indicates that an undesired event or state may occur if
the appropriate precautions are not taken.

Machine manufacturer If changes or additions exist for a particular topic, they are referenced
here:
Please observe the details provided by the machine manufacturer.

References Further references for particular topics are indicated here:

Reference:

A complete list of available literature is included in the Appendix of this

Operator's Guide.

Terms The meanings of several fundamental terms used in this

documentation are defined below:

Program
A program is a sequence of instructions for the CNC control, which
produce a particular workpiece at the machine.

Contour
A contour outlines a workpiece.
The term "contour" is also used to denote the section of a program
that uses individual elements to define the outline of a workpiece.

Cycle
A cycle, for example, mill rectangular pocket, is a subroutine specified
by ShopMill to execute a repetitive machining process.
(a cycle is sometimes also called a "function".)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

0-8 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 0 0
11.02 Preface

"Unit of measurement" The parameter units are always specified in metric units in this
documentation. The corresponding inch measures are given in the
table below.

Metric Inch
mm in
mm/tooth in/tooth
mm/min in/min
mm/rev in/rev
m/min ft/min

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 0-9
 0 0
Preface 11.02

Notes

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

0-10 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 0 0
11.02 Contents

Contents

Introduction 1-17

1.1 The ShopMill product ................................................................................................ 1-18

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-19

1.2.1 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-19
1.2.2 Operator panel keys .................................................................................................. 1-22
1.2.3 Machine control panel ............................................................................................... 1-24
1.2.4 Elements on the machine control panels .................................................................. 1-24
1.2.5 Mini handheld unit ..................................................................................................... 1-28

1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-30

1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-30
1.3.2 Operation via soft key and keys ................................................................................ 1-32
1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36
1.3.4 Setting parameters.................................................................................................... 1-40

1.4 Fundamentals ........................................................................................................... 1-42

1.4.1 Rectangular coordinate system................................................................................. 1-42
1.4.2 Plane designations .................................................................................................... 1-42
1.4.3 Polar coordinates ...................................................................................................... 1-43
1.4.4 Absolute dimension................................................................................................... 1-44
1.4.5 Incremental dimension .............................................................................................. 1-44
1.4.6 Pocket calculator function ......................................................................................... 1-45
1.4.7 Inch/metric dimension system switchover................................................................. 1-46
1.4.8 Switchover between machine and workpiece coordinate systems ........................... 1-47

Operation 2-49

2.1 Power ON and reference point approach.................................................................. 2-51

2.1.1 User confirmation with Safety Integrated .................................................................. 2-54

2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode............................................................ 2-55

2.2.1 Traverse the machine axes....................................................................................... 2-55
2.2.2 Load tool from list into spindle................................................................................... 2-56
2.2.3 Enter a new tool in the list and load it to the spindle ................................................. 2-57
2.2.4 Enter a new tool in the list and load it in the magazine ............................................. 2-58
2.2.5 Start, stop and position the spindle manually............................................................ 2-58
2.2.6 Machine-specific functions ........................................................................................ 2-60
2.2.7 Switch over machining plane/tool axis ...................................................................... 2-60
2.2.8 Switch over to mm or inches ..................................................................................... 2-61

2.3 Set a new position value ........................................................................................... 2-62

2.4 Measure workpiece zero ........................................................................................... 2-64

2.4.1 Manual measurement ............................................................................................... 2-64
2.4.2 Automatic measurement ........................................................................................... 2-69
2.4.3 Calibrate electronic measuring tool........................................................................... 2-74

2.5 Measure tools............................................................................................................ 2-76

2.5.1 Measure tool manually .............................................................................................. 2-76

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 0-11
 0 0
Contents 11.02

2.5.2 Measuring tools with a probe..................................................................................... 2-78

2.5.3 Calibrate measuring probe ........................................................................................ 2-81

2.6 Machining in Manual mode........................................................................................ 2-82

2.6.1 Change settings......................................................................................................... 2-82
2.6.2 Positioning ................................................................................................................. 2-83
2.6.3 Face milling ............................................................................................................... 2-83

2.7 MDI mode.................................................................................................................. 2-85

2.8 Automatic mode ........................................................................................................ 2-86

2.8.1 Switchover between "T, F, S", "G functions" and "Auxiliary functions" displays........ 2-87
2.8.2 Select a program for execution ................................................................................. 2-88
2.8.3 Start/stop/abort program ........................................................................................... 2-89
2.8.4 Interrupt program....................................................................................................... 2-90
2.8.5 Start execution at specific program location.............................................................. 2-91
2.8.6 Program control......................................................................................................... 2-94
2.8.7 Program testing ......................................................................................................... 2-95
2.8.8 Simultaneous recording before machining ................................................................ 2-96
2.8.9 Simultaneous recording during machining ................................................................ 2-97

2.9 Execute a trial program run ....................................................................................... 2-98

2.9.1 Single block ............................................................................................................... 2-98
2.9.2 Basic block display .................................................................................................... 2-99
2.9.3 Correct program ...................................................................................................... 2-100

2.10 Tools and tool offsets .............................................................................................. 2-101

2.10.1 Create a new tool .................................................................................................... 2-105
2.10.2 Create several cutting edges per tool...................................................................... 2-106
2.10.3 Change the tool name ............................................................................................. 2-107
2.10.4 Create a replacement tool ....................................................................................... 2-107
2.10.5 Manual tools ............................................................................................................ 2-107
2.10.6 Tool offsets.............................................................................................................. 2-108
2.10.7 Special tool functions............................................................................................... 2-111
2.10.8 Create tool wear data .............................................................................................. 2-112
2.10.9 Tool monitoring........................................................................................................ 2-113
2.10.10 Magazine list............................................................................................................ 2-114
2.10.11 Delete a tool ............................................................................................................ 2-115
2.10.12 Change the tool type ............................................................................................... 2-115
2.10.13 Load a tool............................................................................................................... 2-116
2.10.14 Unload a tool ...........................................................................................................2-117
2.10.15 Sort tools ................................................................................................................. 2-118

2.11 Work offsets ............................................................................................................ 2-119

2.11.1 Defining a work offset.............................................................................................. 2-121
2.11.2 Work offset list......................................................................................................... 2-122
2.11.3 Select/deselect work offset in the Manual area....................................................... 2-124

2.12 Switching to CNC ISO operation ............................................................................. 2-125

2.13 ShopMill Open (PCU 50) ......................................................................................... 2-126

2.14 Remote diagnosis.................................................................................................... 2-126

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

0-12 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 0 0
11.02 Contents

Programming with ShopMill 3-127

3.1 Fundamental programming principles..................................................................... 3-129

3.2 Program structure ................................................................................................... 3-132

3.3 Create a ShopMill program ..................................................................................... 3-133

3.3.1 Create new program; define a blank ....................................................................... 3-133
3.3.2 Program new blocks................................................................................................ 3-136
3.3.3 Change program blocks .......................................................................................... 3-138
3.3.4 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 3-139

3.4 Program the tool, offset value and spindle speed ................................................... 3-142

3.5 Contour milling ........................................................................................................ 3-143

3.5.1 Free contour programming ..................................................................................... 3-144
3.5.2 Description of soft keys for free contour programming function ............................. 3-147
3.5.3 Description of parameters for line/circle contour elements ..................................... 3-149
3.5.4 Programming examples for freely defined contours ............................................... 3-150
3.5.5 Path milling of open and closed contours ............................................................... 3-153
3.5.6 Rough drilling in contour pockets ............................................................................ 3-156
3.5.7 Machine (rough cut) pocket with islands ................................................................. 3-159
3.5.8 Remove residual material ....................................................................................... 3-160
3.5.9 Finish pocket with islands ....................................................................................... 3-162

3.6 Straight line or circular path motions....................................................................... 3-164

3.6.1 Line.......................................................................................................................... 3-165
3.6.2 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 3-167
3.6.3 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 3-168
3.6.4 Helix ........................................................................................................................ 3-169
3.6.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 3-170
3.6.6 Polar line ................................................................................................................. 3-171
3.6.7 Polar circle .............................................................................................................. 3-172
3.6.8 Programming examples for polar coordinates ........................................................ 3-173

3.7 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 3-174

3.7.1 Centering................................................................................................................. 3-175
3.7.2 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 3-176
3.7.3 Deep-hole drilling .................................................................................................... 3-177
3.7.4 Boring ...................................................................................................................... 3-179
3.7.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 3-180
3.7.6 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 3-181
3.7.7 Drill and thread milling............................................................................................. 3-184
3.7.8 Position on freely programmable positions and position patterns........................... 3-186
3.7.9 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 3-187
3.7.10 Line position pattern ................................................................................................ 3-188
3.7.11 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 3-189
3.7.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 3-190
3.7.13 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 3-192
3.7.14 Obstacle .................................................................................................................. 3-193
3.7.15 Repeat positions ..................................................................................................... 3-194

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 0-13
 0 0
Contents 11.02

3.7.16 Programming examples for drilling.......................................................................... 3-195

3.8 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 3-197

3.8.1 Face milling ............................................................................................................. 3-197
3.8.2 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................. 3-200
3.8.3 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................ 3-204
3.8.4 Rectangular spigot................................................................................................... 3-207
3.8.5 Circular spigot.......................................................................................................... 3-209
3.8.6 Mill longitudinal slot ................................................................................................. 3-212
3.8.7 Circumferential slot.................................................................................................. 3-214
3.8.8 Use of position patterns for milling .......................................................................... 3-216

3.9 Measurements......................................................................................................... 3-219

3.9.1 Measure workpiece zero ......................................................................................... 3-219
3.9.2 Measure tool............................................................................................................ 3-221
3.9.3 Calibrate the measuring probe ................................................................................ 3-222

3.10 Miscellaneous functions .......................................................................................... 3-223

3.10.1 Call subroutine......................................................................................................... 3-223
3.10.2 Repeat program blocks ........................................................................................... 3-224
3.10.3 Change program settings ........................................................................................ 3-226
3.10.4 Call work offsets ...................................................................................................... 3-227
3.10.5 Define coordinate transformation ............................................................................ 3-228
3.10.6 Cylinder peripheral surface transformation ............................................................. 3-231
3.10.7 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 3-234
3.10.8 Miscellaneous functions .......................................................................................... 3-239

3.11 Insert G code in the ShopMill program .................................................................... 3-240

Programming with G Code 4-243

4.1 Create a G code program........................................................................................ 4-244

4.2 Execute G code program ........................................................................................ 4-247

4.3 G code editor ........................................................................................................... 4-249

4.4 Arithmetic parameters ............................................................................................. 4-252

4.5 ISO dialects ............................................................................................................. 4-253

Simulation 5-255

5.1 General.................................................................................................................... 5-256

5.2 Start/abort program ................................................................................................. 5-256

5.3 Representation as a plan view ................................................................................ 5-258

5.4 Representation as a 3-plane view ........................................................................... 5-259

5.5 Zoom a finished part viewport ................................................................................. 5-260

5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part.................................................. 5-261

5.6.1 Change position of finished part.............................................................................. 5-261
5.6.2 Cut open finished part ............................................................................................. 5-262
5.6.3 Update finished part display .................................................................................... 5-262

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

0-14 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 0 0
11.02 Contents

File Management 6-263

6.1 Manage programs with ShopMill............................................................................. 6-264

6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20 .............................................................................. 6-265

6.2.1 Open program ......................................................................................................... 6-267
6.2.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 6-268
6.2.3 Multiple clamping .................................................................................................... 6-268
6.2.4 Execute G code program from floppy disk drive or network drive .......................... 6-271
6.2.5 Create new directory/program................................................................................. 6-272
6.2.6 Select several programs ......................................................................................... 6-273
6.2.7 Copying/renaming directories/programs ................................................................. 6-274
6.2.8 Deleting directories/programs ................................................................................. 6-275
6.2.9 Execute program via RS-232 interface ................................................................... 6-276
6.2.10 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface.............................................................. 6-277
6.2.11 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 6-279
6.2.12 Save/read in tool data/zero point data..................................................................... 6-279

6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50 .............................................................................. 6-282

6.3.1 Open program ......................................................................................................... 6-284
6.3.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 6-285
6.3.3 Multiple clamping .................................................................................................... 6-286
6.3.4 Loading/unloading program .................................................................................... 6-288
6.3.5 Execute G code program from hard disk, floppy disk drive or network drive.......... 6-289
6.3.6 Create new directory/program................................................................................. 6-291
6.3.7 Select several programs ......................................................................................... 6-292
6.3.8 Copying/renaming/moving directories/programs .................................................... 6-293
6.3.9 Deleting directories/programs ................................................................................. 6-295
6.3.10 Execute program via RS-232 interface ................................................................... 6-296
6.3.11 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 6-298
6.3.12 Save/read in tool data/zero point data..................................................................... 6-298

Alarms and Messages 7-301

7.1 Cycle alarms and messages ................................................................................... 7-302

7.1.1 Error treatment in cycles ......................................................................................... 7-302
7.1.2 Cycle alarm overview .............................................................................................. 7-302
7.1.3 Messages in cycles ................................................................................................. 7-307

7.2 Alarms for ShopMill ................................................................................................. 7-308

7.2.1 Alarm overview........................................................................................................ 7-308
7.2.2 Select the alarm/message overview ....................................................................... 7-309
7.2.3 Description of alarms .............................................................................................. 7-310

7.3 User data................................................................................................................. 7-318

7.4 Version display ........................................................................................................ 7-320

Examples 8-321

8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot ........................... 8-322

8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour .................................................................... 8-330

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 0-15
 0 0
Contents 11.02

8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot ................................................................... 8-333

8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation ........................................................... 8-336

8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation ........................................................................ 8-340

8.6 Example 6: Swiveling .............................................................................................. 8-344

Appendix A-351

A Abbreviations...........................................................................................................A-352

B References ..............................................................................................................A-355

C Index........................................................................................................................A-369

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

0-16 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction

Introduction

1.1 The ShopMill product ................................................................................................ 1-18

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-19

1.2.1 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-19
1.2.2 Operator panel keys .................................................................................................. 1-22
1.2.3 Machine control panel ............................................................................................... 1-24
1.2.4 Elements on the machine control panels .................................................................. 1-24
1.2.5 Mini handheld unit ..................................................................................................... 1-28

1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-30

1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-30
1.3.2 Operation via soft key and keys ................................................................................ 1-32
1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36
1.3.4 Setting parameters.................................................................................................... 1-40

1.4 Fundamentals ........................................................................................................... 1-42

1.4.1 Rectangular coordinate system................................................................................. 1-42
1.4.2 Plane designations .................................................................................................... 1-42
1.4.3 Polar coordinates ...................................................................................................... 1-43
1.4.4 Absolute dimension................................................................................................... 1-44
1.4.5 Incremental dimension .............................................................................................. 1-44
1.4.6 Pocket calculator function ......................................................................................... 1-45
1.4.7 Inch/metric dimension system switchover................................................................. 1-46
1.4.8 Switchover between machine and workpiece coordinate systems ........................... 1-47

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-17
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.1 The ShopMill product

1.1 The ShopMill product

The ShopMill operating and programming software has been designed
to perform 2½D milling operations on vertical and universal milling
machinery with a maximum of 5 axes (including 2 rotary axes) and
1 spindle.
The recommended hardware base for ShopMill is a SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D with PCU 20 or PCU 50.
ShopMill has been designed such that machine users can learn
quickly and easily how to operate and program the SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D CNC control system. The standard operator
interface provides access to the full functional scope of the
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D. Workpieces are programmed
graphically, i.e. the user does not need to have G code programming
expertise.

Highlights • Clear program overview in the machining plan

• Dynamic input graphics (programming graphics) for contour
elements and cycles
• Simultaneous recording (option)
• Contour pocket cycles with residual material sensing and residual
material machining (option)
• 3D graphics of finished part
• Optimum adjustment of tool traversing paths taking account of
workpiece contour and obstacles
• Powerful contour computer for entry of freely defined contours
• Automatic generation of approach and retract motions depending
on the tool position and machining type
• Network support and diskette drive connection (option)
• Support for inclinable heads and tilting tables
• Multiface machining, multiple clamping
• Remote diagnostics (option)
• Custom user screens - incl. cycle support

Before actuating any of the control elements on this panel:

Please read all the relevant explanations in this document carefully!

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-18 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

1.2 Workstation

1.2.1 Operator panels

Alternatively, you can also use one of the following operator panels for
the PCUs:

OP 010
OP 010C
OP 010S with OP 032S full CNC keyboard
OP 012
OP 015 with full 19" CNC keyboard

OP 010 operator panel

4

1
.

3 6
2 2

OP 010 operator panel

1 10'' screen
2 Screen keys
3 Horizontal soft key bar
4 Vertical soft key bar
5 Alphanumerical keypad
Correction/cursor keypad with control keyboard and input key
6 USB interface

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-19
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.2 Workstation

OP 010C operator panel

4

1 .

3 6
2 2

OP 010C operator panel

1 10'' screen
2 Screen keys
3 Horizontal soft key bar
4 Vertical soft key bar
5 Alphanumerical keypad
Correction/cursor keypad with control keyboard and input key
6 USB interface

OP 010S slimline
operator panel

2
A 2
A
4
A

3
A

OP 010S operator panel

1 10'' screen
2 Screen keys
3 Horizontal soft key bar
4 Vertical soft key bar
5 USB interface

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-20 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

OP 012 operator panel

5
A

4
A 4
A
1

3
A
2
A 7 6

2
A

OP 012 operator panel

1 12'' screen
2 Screen keys
3 Horizontal soft key bar
4 Vertical soft key bar
5 Alphanumerical keypad
Correction/cursor keypad with control keyboard and input key
6 USB interface
7 Mouse

OP 015 operator panel

1 4
A

2
A 2
A

3
A

OP 015 operator panel

1 15'' screen
2 Screen keys
3 Horizontal soft key bar
4 Vertical soft key bar
5 USB interface

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-21
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.2 Workstation

1.2.2 Operator panel keys

Alarm Cancel
Cancel the alarm that is characterized by this symbol.

Channel
Has no meaning for ShopMill.

Help
Change between machining plan and programming graphics as well
as between parameter screen with programming graphics and
parameter screen with help display.

Next Window
Has no meaning for ShopMill.

Page Up or Page Down

Page up or down in the directory or machining plan.

Cursor
Move between different fields or lines.
Cursor right opens a directory or program.
Cursor left changes to the next higher directory level.

Select
Select from several specified options.
This key corresponds to the "Alternative" soft key.

End
Move cursor to the last input field in a parameter screen.

Backspace
• Delete value in the input field.
• In insert mode, delete the character preceding the cursor.

Tab
Has no meaning for ShopMill.

Shift
Press the Shift key to output the characters at the top of the keys with
dual assignment.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-22 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

Ctrl
Used in the following key combinations in the machining plan and G
code editor:
• Ctrl + Pos1: jump to beginning.
• Ctrl + End: jump to end.

Alt
Has no meaning for ShopMill.

Del - now with OP 031

• Delete value in the parameter field.
• In insert mode, deletes the character where the cursor is
positioned.

Insert
Activate insert mode or pocket calculator.

Input
• Complete input of a value in the input field.
• Open a directory or program.

Alarm - OP 010 and OP 010C only

Invoke "Messages/Alarms" operating area.
This key corresponds to the "Messages/Alarms" soft key.

Program - OP 010 and OP 010C only

Invoke "Program" operating area.
This key corresponds to the "Program" soft key.

Offset - OP 010 and OP 010C only

Invoke "Tools/Work Offsets" operating area.
This key corresponds to the "Tools/Work Offset" soft key.

Program Manager - OP 010 and OP 010C only

Invoke "Program Manager" operating area.
This key corresponds to the "Program Manager" soft key.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-23
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.2 Workstation

1.2.3 Machine control panel

A SIEMENS machine control panel or a machine control panel

supplied by the machine manufacturer can be connected to the turning
machine.
For example, the standard machine control panel (19'') or the slimline
operator control panel OP 032S from SIEMENS.

You trigger actions on the turning machine from the machine control
panel, e.g. traversing axes or machining the workpiece.
When the associated functions are active, the LEDs on the machine
panel light up.

1.2.4 Elements on the machine control panels

Emergency Stop button

Press pushbutton in emergency situations, i.e. if there is a threat to life
or limb of an operator, or if the machine or the workpiece risk being
damaged.
All drives are stopped with the greatest possible braking torque.

For more information about responses when activating the emergency

stop button, please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Reset
Reset • Execution of the active program is aborted.
The NC controller remains synchronized with the machine. It is in
the initial setting and ready for the next program run.
• Delete alarm

Jog
Jog Activate Machine Manual mode.
Teach In
Teach In Has no meaning for ShopMill.
MDI
MDA Activate MDI mode.
Auto
Auto Activate Machine Auto mode.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-24 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

Single Block
Single Block Execute program non-modally (single block).

Repos
Repos Repositioning, re-approach contour.

Ref Point
Ref Point Approach reference point.

Inc Var (incremental feed variable)

VAR Incremental feed with variable step sizes.

Inc (Incremental Feed)

1 10000 Incremental feed with preset step size of
...
1, ..., 10000 increments.

The increment value is evaluated as a function of a machine data.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Cycle Start Cycle Start

Start program execution.

Cycle Stop
Cycle Stop Stop program execution.

Axis keys
X ...
5th Axis Select axis.

Direction keys
+ Traverse axis in negative or positive direction.

Rapid
Rapid Traverse axis in rapid traverse (fastest speed).

WCS MCS
WCS MCS Switch between tool coordinate system (Work) and machine
coordinate system (Machine).

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-25
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.2 Workstation

Feedrate/rapid traverse override

Increase or decrease programmed feed or rapid traverse.
The programmed feed or rapid traverse corresponds to 100% and
%
can be set between 0% and 120%, in rapid traverse to a maximum
of 100%.
The newly set feed is displayed in the feed status bar on the screen as
an absolute value and as a percent value.

Feed Stop
Feed Stop Stop processing the active program and stop the axis drives moving.

Feed Start
Feed Start Continue program execution in the current block and accelerate feed
to the value set in the program.

Spindle override
Decrease or increase programmed spindle speed.
% The programmed spindle speed corresponds to 100% and can be set
from 50 to 120%. The newly set spindle speed is displayed in the
spindle status bar on the screen as an absolute value and as a
percent value.

Spindle Dec. – OP032S machine control panel only

Spindle Dec. Decrease programmed spindle speed.
Spindle Inc. – OP032S machine control panel only
Spindle Inc. Increase programmed spindle speed.
100% – OP032S machine control panel only
100% Set programmed spindle speed again.

Spindle Stop
Spindle Stop Stop the spindle.
Spindle Start
Spindle Start Start the spindle.
Spindle Left – machine control panel OP032S only
Spindle Left Start spindle (CCW rotation).
Spindle Right – machine control panel OP032S only
Spindle Right Start spindle (CW rotation).

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-26 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

Keyswitch
You can set different access rights via the keyswitch. The keyswitch
has four settings with protection levels 4 to 7 assigned to them.
Access to programs, data and functions can be disabled via machine
data. You can set various levels of access protection.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The keyswitch has three different-colored keys which you can remove
in the specified positions:

Position 0 Lowest access

No key authorization
Protection level 7 



Position 1 


Key 1 black 
↓
Protection level 6 Increasing
access authorization
Position 2 
Key 1 green 


Protection level 5 



↓
Position 3 Highest
Key 1 red authorization
Protection level 4

If you change the key position to modify the access authorization, you
will not see the changes immediately on the screen. You first need to
perform an action (e.g. open or close a directory).

If the PLC is in STOP state (LEDs on the machine control panel are
flashing), ShopMill does not evaluate the keyswitch settings at boot.

The machine manufacturer can set protection levels 0 to 3 via a

password. If this password is set, ShopMill does not assess the
keyswitch setting.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-27
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.2 Workstation

1.2.5 Mini handheld unit

20 60 108

F
E
H
216

D
B

88 I C 83,5

A EMERGENCY STOP button, two-channel

B Enabling key, two-channel
C Axis selector switch for 5 axes and neutral position
D Function keys F1, F2, F3
E Traversing keys, directions +, –
F Rapid traverse key for high-speed travel with traversing keys or
handwheel
G Handwheel
H Magnets for attachment to metal parts
I 1.5 m ... 3.5 m connecting lead

Control elements EMERGENCY STOP button

Use the EMERGENCY STOP button in urgent situations, i.e.
1. when human life is at risk or
2. if there is a risk of damage to the machine tool or workpiece.

Enabling key
The enabling key has 2 settings. It must be pressed to initiate
traversing movements.

Axis selector switch

You can select up to 5 axes with the axis selector switch.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-28 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

Function keys
You can activate machine-specific functions with the function keys.

Traversing keys
The + and – traversing keys can be pressed to move the axis selected
with the axis selector switch.

Handwheel
The handwheel can be used to move the axis selected with the axis
selector switch. The handwheel supplies 2 track signals with 100 l/V.

Rapid traverse key

The rapid traverse key increases the traversing speed of the axis
selected with the axis selector switch. The rapid traverse key acts both
on travel commands from the +/– keys and on the handwheel signals.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-29
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.3 User interface

1.3 User interface

1.3.1 Overview

Screen layout 14
1 2
5 4
6 3

8
7

9 13

10

11
12
15 15

14

User interface

1 Active operating mode/operating area and sub-operating mode

2 Alarm and message line
3 Program name
4 Program path
5 Channel status and program control
6 Channel status messages
7 Position display for axes
8 Display for
• active tool T
• current feed F
• spindle S
9 Display the active work offsets and rotation
10 Working window
11 Dialog line for additional explanations
12 Horizontal soft key bar
13 Vertical soft key bar
14 Soft keys
15 Screen keys

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-30 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.3 User interface

Submode REF: Approach reference point

REPOS: Repositioning
INC1 ... INC10000: Fixed increment
INC_VAR: Variable increment size

Channel status RESET

active
interrupted

Program control SKP: Skip a G code block

DRY: Dry run feed
!ROV:Feedrate override only (not feedrate and rapid traverse
override)
SBL1: Single block (stop after each block that triggers a function on
the machine)
SBL2: Not possible to select in ShopMill (stop each every block)
SBL3: Single block fine (stop after each block, even within the same
cycle)
M01: Programmed stop
DRF: DRF offset
PRT: Program test

Channel status Hold: Operator action is necessary.

messages
Wait: No operator action is necessary.

Feed status Feed not enabled

Spindle status Spindle not enabled

Spindle motionless
Spindle rotating CW
Spindle rotating CCW

The symbols are color-coded as follows:

Red: Machine is not running
Green: Machine is running
Yellow: Waiting for operator action
Gray: Other

Screen keys
Machine
Call active operating mode (Machine Manual, MDI or Machine Auto).

Return jump
Has no meaning for ShopMill.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-31
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.3 User interface

Expansion
Change horizontal soft key bar.

Menu Select
Call main menu:

Symbols defined by the machine manufacturer can be displayed

instead of the program path (4). The program path is then displayed
together with the program name (3).
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

1.3.2 Operation via soft key and keys

The ShopMill user interface consists of different screens featuring

eight horizontal and eight vertical soft keys. Operate the soft keys via
the keys positioned next to the soft keys.
Upon activation of a soft key, a new screen opens.

ShopMill has 3 operating modes (Machine Manual, MDI and Machine

Auto) and 4 operating areas (Program Manager, Program
Messages/Alarms and Tools/Work Offsets).

If you want to switch from one operating mode/operating area to

another operating area, press the "Menu Select" key. The main menu
is opened and you can select the required operating area by pressing
the associated soft key.

Alternatively, you can access the operating areas via the keys on the
operator panel.

You can select an operating mode at any time directly via the keys on
Jog MDA Auto the machine control panel.
If you press the "Machine" soft key in the main menu, the screen
belonging to the currently active operating mode opens.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-32 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.3 User interface

If you select another operating mode or another operating area, both

the horizontal and the vertical soft key bar change.

Main menu

Machine Manual mode

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-33
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.3 User interface

If you activate a horizontal soft key within an operating mode or

operating area, only the vertical soft key bar changes.

Machine Manual mode

Function within Machine Manual mode

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-34 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.3 User interface

If the symbol is displayed on the operator interface on the right of

the dialog line, you can change the horizontal soft key bar within an
operating area. To do this, press the "Expansion" soft key. If you press
the "Expansion" soft key again, the original horizontal soft key bar is
displayed again.

To return to a next-level screen within an operating mode/operating

area, press the "Back" soft key.

Press the "Cancel" soft key to exit a screen without accepting the
specified values and return to the next-level screen.

If you have entered all the necessary parameters correctly in the

parameter screen, press the "Accept" soft key to close the screen and
validate the data.

Pressing the "OK" soft key will trigger an immediate action, e.g.
rename or delete a program.

When some soft key functions are activated, the soft key background
ON color will change to black to indicate the function in ON.
Program To deactivate the function again, press the soft key again. The soft
test OFF key will be gray again.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-35
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.3 User interface

1.3.3 Program views

You can display a ShopMill program in various views.

Program manager All the programs are administered in the Program Manager. You also
use the Program Manager to select a program for workpiece
machining.

Program Manager

Select the Program Manager by activating the "Program" soft key or

-or- the "Program Manager" key.

You can navigate within a directory by pressing the "Cursor up" and
"Cursor down" keys.

Use "Cursor right" to open a directory.

Use the "Cursor left" key to return to the next higher directory level.

Use the "Cursor right" or "Input" key to open the machining plan for a
-or- program.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-36 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.3 User interface

Machining plan The machining plan provides an overview of the individual machining
steps in a program.

Machining plan

In the machining plan, you can use the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down"
keys to navigate among the program blocks.

Use the "Help" key to switch between the machining plan and
programming graphics.

Programming graphic The programming graphics display a dynamic broken-line top view of
the workpiece. The program block selected in the machining plan is
highlighted in color in the programming graphics.

Programming graphic

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-37
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.3 User interface

Use the "Cursor right" key to open a program block in the machining
plan. The associated parameter screen with programming graphics is
opened.

Parameter screen with The programming graphics in the parameter screen show the contour
programming graphics of the active machining step as broken-line graphics as well as the
parameters.

Parameter screen with programming graphics

You can use the cursor keys to navigate among the input fields in the
parameter screen.

Press the "Help" key to change between programming graphics and

the help display in the parameter screen.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-38 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.3 User interface

Parameter screen with The help display in the parameter screen provides information about
help display the individual parameters in the machining step.

Parameter screen with help display

The color symbols in the help displays indicate the following:

Yellow circle = reference point
Red arrow = tool travelling in rapid traverse
Green arrow = tool travelling at machining feedrate

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-39
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.3 User interface

1.3.4 Setting parameters

When setting up the machine and programming, you need to specify

values for specific parameters in the white input fields.
Parameters that have a gray input field are automatically calculated by
ShopMill.

White Gray
field input field input

Parameter

Unit

Parameter screen

Select parameters With some parameters the input field will offer you several options to
select from. In these fields you cannot enter any data.

! Keep pressing the "Alternative" soft key or the "Select" key until
-or- the desired setting is displayed.

The "Alternative" soft key is only visible if the cursor is positioned on

an input field with more than one option. Similarly, the "Select" key is
only effective if it is possible to make a selection.

Setting parameters For the remaining parameters you need to enter a numerical value in
the input field by using the keys on the operator panel.

! Enter the required value.

! Press the "Input" key to terminate your input.

If you do not want to enter a value, i.e. not even value "0", press the
-or- "Backspace" or "Del" key.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-40 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.3 User interface

Select a unit With some of these parameters, you can choose from different units.

! Keep pressing the "Alternative" soft key or the "Select" key until
-or- the desired unit is displayed.

The "Alternative" soft key is only visible if you can select from different
units for this parameter. Similarly, the "Select" key is only effective if it
is possible to make a selection.

Delete parameter If one of the input fields contains an incorrect value, you can delete the
entire value.

! Press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.

-or-

Edit/calculate parameter If you do not want to overwrite the entire value in an input field, but
only edit individual characters, change to insert mode. The pocket
calculator is also active in this mode; you can use it to calculate
parameter values during programming.

! Press the "Insert" key.

Insert mode and the pocket calculator are activated.

You can navigate within an input field by pressing the "Cursor left" and
"Cursor right" keys.
You can delete individual characters by pressing the "Backspace" or
"Del" key.

For more information about the pocket calculator, please refer to the
section entitled "Pocket Calculator".

Accept parameters If you have entered all the necessary parameters correctly in the
parameter screen, you can exit the screen and save your settings.

! Press the "Accept" soft key or the "Cursor left" key.

-or- If there are more than one input fields in a line and you want to
accept the parameter with the "Cursor left" key, you must place
the cursor in the input field on the far left.

You cannot accept parameters if these are incomplete or largely

incorrect. The dialog line will then inform you which parameters are
missing or faulty.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-41
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.4 Fundamentals

1.4 Fundamentals

1.4.1 Rectangular coordinate system

The principle of machining workpieces on a mill is based on a

rectangular coordinate system consisting of three coordinate axes – X,
Y and Z – which are parallel to the machine axes.

The orientation of the coordinate system in relation to the machine is

dependent on the machine type. The axis directions are governed by
the so-called "Right-hand rule" (according to DIN 66217).

Imagine you are standing in front of the machine with the middle finger
on your right hand pointing in the infeed direction of the main spindle.
The following then applies:

• Your thumb is then pointing in direction +X,

• your index finger in direction +Y and
• your middle finger in direction +Z.

Z Y
+Z

+Y

+X
X

Machine coordinate system and "Right-hand rule"

1.4.2 Plane designations

Each plane is defined by two coordinate axes. The third coordinate

axis (tool axis) in each case is perpendicular to this plane and
determines the infeed direction of the tool (e.g. for 2½ D milling
operations).

When you program a workpiece, Z

you must specify the plane in Z
Y
Y/
which you are working so that the
control can calculate the tool offset Z/
X
values correctly. The plane is also
X/
significant for certain types of circle Y
programming and for polar
coordinates. X

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-42 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.4 Fundamentals

Working planes are defined as follows:

Plane Tool axis

X/Y Z
Z/X Y
Y/Z X

1.4.3 Polar coordinates

The rectangular coordinate system is suitable in cases where

dimensions in the production drawing are orthogonal. For workpieces
dimensioned with arcs or angles, it is better to define positions using
polar coordinates. This is possible if you are programming a straight
line or a circle (see Section "Program simple path motions").

Polar coordinates have their zero point in the "pole".

Example: Y
Using this system, points P1 and
P2
P2 could be defined as follows – in P1
relation to the pole –:

60
P1:Radius =100 plus angle =30°
75° 0
10 30°
P2:Radius =60 plus angle =75°
Pole
30

X
15

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-43
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.4 Fundamentals

1.4.4 Absolute dimension

With an absolute dimension, all position data always refer to the

currently valid zero point. With respect to tool motion, this means:

The absolute dimension describes the

position to which the tool must move.

Example: Y
The positions for points P1 to P3
as absolute dimensions are as P2
follows in relation to the zero
point:
P1
P1: X20 Y35

60
P3
P2: X50 Y60

35
P3: X70 Y20

20
X
20
50
70

1.4.5 Incremental dimension

In the case of production drawings in which dimensions refer to some

other point on the workpiece rather than the zero point, it is possible to
enter an incremental dimension.

With an incremental dimension input, a position specification refers in

each case to a point programmed beforehand.

Example:
Y
The positions for points P1 to P3
as incremental dimensions are as
P2
follows:
P1: X20 Y35 ;(in relation to the
20

P1
zero point)
15

P3
P2: X30 Y20 ;(in relation to P1)
20

X
P3: X20 Y-35 ;(in relation to P2)
20 30 20

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-44 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.4 Fundamentals

1.4.6 Pocket calculator function

Function

Precondition The cursor is positioned on a parameter field.

Press the "Insert" key

or
Equal key
=
to activate pocket calculator mode.
To perform an arithmetic function on two values, press this key and
then enter the symbol for the relevant function (+, –, *, / ) followed by a
value.
Then press the Input key and the second value to perform the
calculation.

Example application:
A tool wear value in length L of
+ 0.1 must be included in a tool calculation.

• Place the cursor in the appropriate parameter setting field,

• Press the Equals key to open the parameter field and
• Add the new wear value to the existing value,
e.g. 0.5 + 0.1
• Terminate calculation by pressing the "Input" key.
Result: 0.6

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-45
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.4 Fundamentals

1.4.7 Inch/metric dimension system switchover

Function

This function enables you to switch between the metric and inch
dimension systems depending on the dimension units used in your
production drawing.

Every dimension system switchover applies to the entire machine, i.e.

all relevant measurement data are automatically converted to the new
dimension system, e.g.

• Positions
• Tool offsets
• Work offsets

Operating sequence

In "Machine Manual" operating mode change to the expanded

Jog horizontal soft key bar.

Press soft keys "ShopM. Settings" and "Inch"

Inch • Switch from metric to inches: Soft key is active

Inch • Switch from inches to metric: Soft key is not active

When you press the "Inch" soft key, a prompt box appears asking you
to confirm the switchover operation.

The dimension system is adjusted correspondingly when you confirm

with the "OK" soft key.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-46 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 1 1
11.02 Introduction
1.4 Fundamentals

1.4.8 Switchover between machine and workpiece coordinate systems

Function

The machine coordinate system (MCS) is the original system of your

machine. In contrast to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS), it
does not allow for tool offsets, work offset, scalings, etc.

Operating sequence

You can switch between the machine and workpiece coordinate

systems by following the sequence below:
Press the "WCS MCS" key on the machine control panel.
WCS MCS

or

Select soft key "Actual value MCS" in "Machine Manual" or "Machine

Jog Auto Auto" operating mode.

Actual • Switch from WCS (work) to MCS (machine): Soft key is active.
value MCS

Actual • Switch from MCS (work) to WCS (machine): Soft key is not active.
value MCS

"

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 1-47
 1 1
Introduction 11.02
1.4 Fundamentals

Notes

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

1-48 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation

Operation

2.1 Power ON and reference point approach.................................................................. 2-51

2.1.1 User confirmation with Safety Integrated .................................................................. 2-54

2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode............................................................ 2-55

2.2.1 Traverse the machine axes....................................................................................... 2-55
2.2.2 Load tool from list into spindle................................................................................... 2-56
2.2.3 Enter a new tool in the list and load it to the spindle ................................................. 2-57
2.2.4 Enter a new tool in the list and load it in the magazine ............................................. 2-58
2.2.5 Start, stop and position the spindle manually............................................................ 2-58
2.2.6 Machine-specific functions ........................................................................................ 2-60
2.2.7 Switch over machining plane/tool axis ...................................................................... 2-60
2.2.8 Switch over to mm or inches ..................................................................................... 2-61

2.3 Set a new position value ........................................................................................... 2-62

2.4 Measure workpiece zero ........................................................................................... 2-64

2.4.1 Manual measurement ............................................................................................... 2-64
2.4.2 Automatic measurement ........................................................................................... 2-69
2.4.3 Calibrate electronic measuring tool........................................................................... 2-74

2.5 Measure tools............................................................................................................ 2-76

2.5.1 Measure tool manually .............................................................................................. 2-76
2.5.2 Measuring tools with a probe .................................................................................... 2-78
2.5.3 Calibrate measuring probe........................................................................................ 2-81

2.6 Machining in Manual mode ....................................................................................... 2-82

2.6.1 Change settings ........................................................................................................ 2-82
2.6.2 Positioning................................................................................................................. 2-83
2.6.3 Face milling ............................................................................................................... 2-83

2.7 MDI mode.................................................................................................................. 2-85

2.8 Automatic mode ........................................................................................................ 2-86

2.8.1 Switchover between "T, F, S", "G functions" and "Auxiliary functions" displays........ 2-87
2.8.2 Select a program for execution ................................................................................. 2-88
2.8.3 Start/stop/abort program ........................................................................................... 2-89
2.8.4 Interrupt program ...................................................................................................... 2-90
2.8.5 Start execution at specific program location ............................................................. 2-91
2.8.6 Program control......................................................................................................... 2-94
2.8.7 Program testing......................................................................................................... 2-95
2.8.8 Simultaneous recording before machining................................................................ 2-96
2.8.9 Simultaneous recording during machining ................................................................ 2-97

2.9 Execute a trial program run....................................................................................... 2-98

2.9.1 Single block ............................................................................................................... 2-98
2.9.2 Basic block display.................................................................................................... 2-99
2.9.3 Correct program ...................................................................................................... 2-100

2.10 Tools and tool offsets .............................................................................................. 2-101

2.10.1 Create a new tool .................................................................................................... 2-105

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-49
 2 2
Operation 11.02

2.10.2 Create several cutting edges per tool...................................................................... 2-106

2.10.3 Change the tool name ............................................................................................. 2-107
2.10.4 Create a replacement tool ....................................................................................... 2-107
2.10.5 Manual tools ............................................................................................................ 2-107
2.10.6 Tool offsets.............................................................................................................. 2-108
2.10.7 Special tool functions............................................................................................... 2-111
2.10.8 Create tool wear data .............................................................................................. 2-112
2.10.9 Tool monitoring........................................................................................................ 2-113
2.10.10 Magazine list............................................................................................................ 2-114
2.10.11 Delete a tool ............................................................................................................ 2-115
2.10.12 Change the tool type ............................................................................................... 2-115
2.10.13 Load a tool............................................................................................................... 2-116
2.10.14 Unload a tool ...........................................................................................................2-117
2.10.15 Sort tools ................................................................................................................. 2-118

2.11 Work offsets ............................................................................................................ 2-119

2.11.1 Defining a work offset.............................................................................................. 2-121
2.11.2 Work offset list......................................................................................................... 2-122
2.11.3 Select/deselect work offset in the Manual area....................................................... 2-124

2.12 Switching to CNC ISO operation ............................................................................. 2-125

2.13 ShopMill Open (PCU 50) ......................................................................................... 2-126

2.14 Remote diagnosis.................................................................................................... 2-126

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-50 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.1 Power ON and reference point approach

2.1 Power ON and reference point approach

Switching control system

ON and OFF
Function

Switch ON A variety of methods can be employed to switch on the power supply

to the control system or to the whole plant.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

After power ON, the main "Machine Manual" display appears on the
screen

Main "Machine Manual" display

Switch OFF For details on how to switch off the power supply to the control system
or the whole plant:

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-51
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.1 Power ON and reference point approach

Reference point
approach
Function

The "Ref" function is used to synchronize the control system and

machine after power ON.
Various reference point approach methods may be employed.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

• The reference point can be applied only with respect to machine

axes. The actual value display after power ON does not coincide
with the actual position of the axes.
• A reference point must be approached in cases where there is no
absolute measuring system installed on the machine!

Caution

If the axes are not positioned safely, then you must reposition them
accordingly.
When doing so, please pay careful attention to the axis motions
directly on the machine!
Ignore the actual value display until the axes have been referenced!
Software limit switches are not operative!

Operating sequence

Operating mode "Machine Manual" is selected.

Jog

Select machine function "Ref Point" .

Ref Point

Select the axis that you wish to move and

X ...

then press the "-" or "+" key.

+
Your selected axis moves to the reference point. The direction or
sequence is defined by the PLC program supplied by the machine
manufacturer.
If you have pressed the wrong direction key, the input will not be
accepted and the axis does not move.
The display now shows the reference point value.

No symbol is displayed for axes which are not yet referenced.

This symbol is displayed next to the axis when it has reached

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-52 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.1 Power ON and reference point approach

the reference point.

You can stop the axis you have started before it reaches the reference
Feed Stop point.

Select the axis that you wish to move and

X ...

then press the "-" or "+" key.

+ Your selected axis moves to the reference point.

Caution

The machine is synchronized with the control once the axes have
been referenced. The actual value display is set to the reference point
value. It shows the difference between the machine zero and the slide
reference point. From this moment onwards, path limitations such as
software limit switches are operative.

End the function via the machine control panel by selecting operating
mode "Machine Auto" or "Machine Manual".

• You can reference all axes simultaneously (depending on the PLC

program supplied by the machine tool manufacturer).
• The feedrate override is operative.

Further notes

The machine tool manufacturer may specify the sequence in which

axes must be referenced.

Only when all axes with a defined reference point have reached this
point will you be able to activate NC Start in "Machine Auto".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-53
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.1 Power ON and reference point approach

2.1.1 User confirmation with Safety Integrated

If you use Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you need to confirm
during reference point approach that the displayed current position of
an axis corresponds to the real position on the machine. This
confirmation is necessary for the other Safety Integrated functions to
operate.

The user can only confirm for an axis if the axis has been previously
referenced.

The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate

system (Machine).

For more information about user confirmation, please refer to:

References: /FBSI/, Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety
Integrated

! Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog

! Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

Ref Point

! Press an axis key.

+X ...
Z
Your selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The
reference point coordinate is displayed. The axis is highlighted with

User Con- ! Press the "User Confirmation" soft key.

firmation
! Position the cursor on the desired axis.

! Confirm the machine position.

The axis status is now "safely referenced".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-54 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

2.2.1 Traverse the machine axes

Function

You can perform the following tasks in Manual mode:

1. Synchronize the control system with the machine (reference point
approach).
2. Set up the machine, i.e. activate manually controlled motions on
the machine using the keys and handwheels provided on the
machine control panel.
3. Activate manually controlled motions on the machine using the
keys and handwheels provided on the machine control panel while
a part program is interrupted.

Traverse axes by keys

Operating sequence

By pressing the increment keys, you can move the selected axis in
defined increments in the appropriate direction every time you press
an "Axis key" in manual mode.
The axes themselves traverse at the programmed setup feedrate.
Preset increments

• You can select preset increments by pressing keys [1], [10], ...,
1 10000 [10000]
...
• You can define variable increments via the "ShopM. Settings"
menu in the extended horizontal soft key bar:

Select with soft key

Enter the increment of your choice in parameter "Variable

increment".

Using the "Inc Var" key, move the selected axis by the preset
VAR increment with the "Axis key" in Manual mode.

Example: With an increment of 0.5mm, set a variable increment

of 500.

Set setup feedrate The "Setup feedrate" parameter is also entered in the "ShopMill
Settings" menu. The setting in this parameter defines the feedrate (in
mm/min) at which axes must traverse in setup mode.
A limitation for the maximum feed velocity is programmed in a
machine data.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-55
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

Select the axis that you wish to move and

X ...
then press the "-" or "+" key.
+
The feedrate and rapid traverse override switches may be operative.

Depending on the PLC program, you may be able to select more than
one axis at a time.

Further notes

• After the control power supply has been switched on, it may be
possible to move axes into the limit zone of the machine as they
have not yet been referenced. They may trigger emergency limit
switches in this zone.
• The software limit switches and working area limitation are not yet
operative!
• The feed enable signal must be set.

Traverse axes by means

of handwheels
Please note the machine manufacturer's instruction manual with
regard to the selection and mode of operation of handwheels.

2.2.2 Load tool from list into spindle

Operating sequence

Press the "Jog" key and then soft key "T, S, M.".
Jog

The cursor is positioned on the input field of tool parameter "T":

Call the tool list via the soft key

or
key

Select the tool of your choice in the tool list and

Back to confirm your selection.

manual

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-56 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

The tool is accepted.

You can select a cutting edge D.

Upon confirmation with the "Cycle

Cycle Start Start" key, the tool is inserted into
the spindle.

2.2.3 Enter a new tool in the list and load it to the spindle

Operating sequence

Prepare for loading

Go into the "Machine Manual" area and select function "T, S, M.".
Jog

The cursor is positioned on the input field of tool parameter "T":

Enter tool in tool list

Tools
Call the tool list by selecting key "Offset" or soft key "Tools".
or
Select a free tool in the tool list and enter a new tool (as described in
Section "Tools and tool offsets").

Back to Select the "Back to manual" soft key to return automatically to the
manual "T,S,M,..." function. The tool name is now entered in the input field of
tool parameter "T".

Execute tool change

operation

The tool change is enabled when you press "Cycle Start".

Cycle Start

The loaded tool is marked by a spindle symbol in the tool list.

Now load the tool manually into the spindle as described in the
machine manufacturer's instruction manual.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-57
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

2.2.4 Enter a new tool in the list and load it in the magazine

Operating sequence

Enter tool in tool list

Call the tool list by selecting the "Offset" key

or select soft key "Tools WOs".

Select a free slot in the tool list and enter a new tool (as described in
Section "Tools and tool offsets").

New Select soft key "New tool".

tool

Cutter 3D Select the tool type of your choice and enter a tool name. Enter the
... probe tool offsets if applicable.

Load tool to magazine

Load If the magazine on your machine has variable location assignment,

execute the "Load" function.

If it is a magazine with fixed location assignment, load the tool in the

required magazine location as described in the machine
manufacturer's instruction manual.

2.2.5 Start, stop and position the spindle manually

Operating sequence

Set the spindle speed

Select the menu "T, S, M" in the "Machine Manual" operating mode.
Jog

Enter the speed setting of your choice in the spindle speed input field.

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start

If the spindle is already rotating, it will accelerate/decelerate to the new

speed setting. If the spindle is stationary, the value is stored as the
setpoint speed. The spindle remains stationary.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-58 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

Start/stop spindle

The "Spindle Left" or "Spindle Right" keys start the spindle rotating at
Spindle Left Spindle Right the preset spindle speed and the currently valid spindle override
weighting.

You can stop the spindle again by pressing the "Spindle Stop" key.
Spindle Stop

Alternative method

You can also select Start/Stop Spindle in the "Spindle" selection field
Jog in menu "T, S, M".

Clockwise spindle rotation:

CCW spindle rotation:

Spindle Stop:

and then execute by pressing "Cycle Start".

Cycle Start

Position spindle You can use this function to position the spindle at a specific angle,
e.g. during a tool change.
• A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route.
• A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same
direction.
Spindle positions are specified in degrees.

Select the menu "T, S, M" in the "Machine Manual" operating mode.
Jog

Select the symbol for spindle

position in the "Spindle" selection
field. The "Stop Pos." input field is
displayed in which you must enter
a spindle stop position.

The spindle is turned to the selected position when you press "Cycle
Cycle Start Start".

Change the spindle speed

The spindle override switch can be used to set spindle speed S to

between 50 and 120% of the last speed setting.

Or you can use the following keys on the OP032S operator panel:

You can reduce or increase programmed spindle speed "S"

Spindle Dec. Spindle Inc. (corresponds to 100%) using the "Spindle Dec." or "Spindle Inc." keys.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-59
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

Press key "100%" if you wish to set the programmed spindle speed.
100%

2.2.6 Machine-specific functions

Function

Gear stage

If your machine has a gear unit for the spindle, you can set the gear
Jog stage in selection field "Gear stage" in menu "T, S, M"
and then activate it by pressing "Cycle Start".
Cycle Start

Other special functions The machine manufacturer determines which additional special
functions are available for your use.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

2.2.7 Switch over machining plane/tool axis

Function

If your machine has a swivel-mounted work spindle, you can select the
Jog machining plane in the "Tool axis" selection field in menu "T, S, M".

This parameter is relevant for all screenforms in the Manual area, i.e.
it influences the parameter displays for face milling or measurements.
In addition, the plane setting determines how tool offsets are
calculated in workpiece and tool measurements.

For instructions on how to swivel the spindle, please refer to

information supplied by the machine manufacturer.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-60 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

2.2.8 Switch over to mm or inches

Function

The selected unit of measurement affects the actual value display and
distance-defining parameters.

You can switch over between mm and inches in the "Unit of

Jog measurement" selection field in menu "T, S, M" in the "Machine
Manual" operating mode

and then activate it by pressing "Cycle Start".

Cycle Start

The setting applies to the Manual area and remains valid until you
switch to the other unit. In Automatic mode, the unit of measurement
displayed in the program header is always activated.

Tool offsets and work offsets remain in the original basic system in
which the system is set.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-61
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.3 Set a new position value

2.3 Set a new position value

Function

You can use the "Set work offset" function to enter a new position
value for each individual axis in the actual value display.
The difference between the position value in the machine coordinate
system Machine and the new position value in the workpiece
coordinate system Work is saved in the currently active work offset or,
if none is selected, in the basic offset. When the values in the active
work offset are saved, they are stored in the coarse offset and the
existing values in the fine offset are deleted.
The currently active work offset for the respective axis is displayed
below the axis position window.

Operating sequence

Move the machine axes to the desired position (e.g. workpiece

surface).

Select the "Set WO" menu in operating mode "Machine Manual".

Jog

Basic offset menu

Set position value You can enter new position values in the following ways:

• Directly via the input keypad.

Increase/decrease value via cursor keys. Terminate the input by
pressing the "Input" key.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-62 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.3 Set a new position value

• Via soft keys if you want to set position values to 0.

Reset offset

Select with soft key

Delete

The offset is reset again when you select the "Delete" soft key.

The work offsets (WO1 etc.) are based on the basic offset.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-63
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

2.4 Measure workpiece zero

The workpiece zero is always used as the reference point when

programming a workpiece. You determine the workpiece zero either
manually or automatically, depending on the tool.

The workpiece zero is saved in a work offset, i.e. the values are stored
in the coarse offset and the existing values in the fine offset are
deleted.

When you measure the zero point manually, you need to traverse your
tool manually to the workpiece. You can either use edge probes,
sensing probes or dial gauges with known radii and lengths. You can
also use any other tool of which you know the radius and length.
These tools must always be specified as edge probe type in the tool
management.

With automatic measuring, you must first preposition the tool

manually, then the tool is automatically traversed to the workpiece.
You may only use electronic sensing probes and you must calibrate
them first. These tools must always be specified as 3D probe in the
tool management.

2.4.1 Manual measurement

With manual measurement, you can choose whether to traverse the

tool to an edge or a corner of the workpiece. If you decide to use a
corner as the workpiece reference point, you can also account for a
rotation of the workpiece with regard to the machine table.
In addition, you can determine the center point of a hole or spigot as
the zero point, e.g. for remachining.
The Z coordinate of the zero point is always determined via "Measure
Edge".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-64 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

Measuring edge

! Insert an edge probe type tool in the spindle.

! Traverse the tool to near the workpiece edge you want to

determine first.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the "Meas. workp." softkey.

Jog

Edge ! Press soft key "Edge".

X ! Use the soft keys to select in which axis direction you want to
Z
... approach the workpiece first.

! Select the desired offset where you want to save the zero position.

-or-
Work offset ! Press soft key "Work offset".

-and-
! Position the cursor on the desired work offset.

-and-
In manual ! Press soft key "In manual".

! Select the direction (+ or -) you want to approach the workpiece in.

! Specify the setpoint position of the workpiece edge you are

approaching.
The setpoint position corresponds, e.g. to the dimension
specifications of the workpiece edge from the workpiece drawing.

! Traverse the tool to the workpiece edge.

Set WO ! Press soft key "Set WO".

The first coordinate of the workpiece zero - thus also the work offset -
is calculated. The tool radius is automatically included in the
calculation.
Example: Setpoint position workpiece edge X0 = -50
Approach direction +
Tool radius = 3mm
Work offset X = 53

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-65
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

! Repeat the process for the other two axes.

Measure corner

! Insert an edge probe type tool in the spindle.

! Traverse the tool to near the workpiece corner you want to

measure.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the "Meas. workp." soft key.

Jog

Corner ! Press the "Corner" soft key.

! Select the desired offset where you want to save the zero position.

-or-
Work offset ! Press soft key "Work offset".

-and-
! Position the cursor on the desired work offset.

-and-
In manual ! Press soft key "In manual".

! Select the position of the workpiece corner you want to measure.

! Specify setpoints X0 and Y0 of the workpiece corner you want to

measure.
The setpoint position corresponds, e.g. to the dimension
specifications of the workpiece corner from the workpiece
drawing.

! Traverse the tool to the first measuring point P1.

Save P1 ! Press the "Save P1" soft key.

! Traverse the tool to the second measuring point P2.

Save P2 ! Press the "Save P2" soft key.

! Repeat this process for measuring points P3 and P4.

With an orthogonal workpiece you only need to approach 3
measuring points to determine its home position.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-66 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

Set position ! Press the "Set position" soft key.

The work offset and rotation α0 are calculated. The tool radius is
automatically included in the calculation.

Measure hole

! Insert an edge probe type tool in the spindle.

! Move the tool into the hole.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the " Meas. workp." soft key.
Jog

Hole ! Press the "Hole" soft key.

! Select the desired offset where you want to save the zero position.

-or-
Work offset ! Press soft key "Work offset".

-and-
! Position the cursor on the desired work offset.

-and-
In manual ! Press soft key "In manual".

! Specify setpoints X0 and Y0 of the hole center point.

! Traverse the tool to the first measuring point P1.

Save P1 ! Press the "Save P1" soft key.

! Traverse the tool to the second measuring point P2.

Save P2 ! Press the "Save P2" soft key.

! Repeat the process for measuring points P3 and P4.

Set position ! Press the "Set position" soft key.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-67
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

The hole diameter is calculated and the specified setpoint position is

saved as the new zero point. The tool radius is automatically included
in the calculation.

Measure spigot

! Insert an edge probe type tool in the spindle.

! Move the tool near the spigot.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the " Meas. workp." soft key.
Jog

Spigot ! Press the "Spigot" soft key.

! Select the desired offset where you want to save the zero position.

-or-
Work offset ! Press soft key "Work offset".

-and-
! Position the cursor on the desired work offset.

-and-
In manual ! Press soft key "In manual".

! Specify setpoints X0 and Y0 of the spigot center point.

! Traverse the tool to the first measuring point P1.

Save P1 ! Press the "Save P1" soft key.

! Traverse the tool to the second measuring point P2.

Save P2 ! Press the "Save P2" soft key.

! Repeat the process for measuring points P3 and P4.

Set position ! Press the "Set position" soft key.

The spigot diameter is calculated and the specified setpoint position is

saved as the new zero point. The tool radius is automatically included
in the calculation.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-68 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

2.4.2 Automatic measurement

With automatic measurement, you can choose whether to traverse the

tool to an edge or a corner of the workpiece. If you decide to use a
corner as the workpiece reference point, you can also account for a
rotation of the workpiece with regard to the machine table.
In addition, you can determine the center point of a hole or spigot as
the zero point, e.g. for remachining.
The Z coordinate of the zero point is always determined via "Measure
Edge".

For automatic workpiece zero measurement, the machine

manufacturer must have first set the parameters for measuring cycles.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Measuring edge

! Insert a 3D probe type tool in the spindle.

! Traverse the tool to near the workpiece edge you want to

determine first.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the " Meas. workp." soft key.
Jog

Edge ! Press soft key "Edge".

! Use the soft keys to select in which axis direction you want to
X Z
... approach the workpiece first.

! Select the desired offset where you want to save the zero position.

-or-
Work offset ! Press soft key "Work offset".

-and-
! Position the cursor on the desired work offset.

-and-

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-69
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

In manual ! Press soft key "In manual".

! Select the direction (+ or -) you want to approach the workpiece in.

! Specify the setpoint position of the workpiece edge you are

approaching.
The setpoint position corresponds, e.g. to the dimension
specifications of the workpiece edge from the workpiece drawing.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
The automatic measuring process is started. Travel to the workpiece
edge is initiated at the measuring feedrate specified via machine data;
the return path back to the starting position is traveled in rapid
traverse.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Then the first coordinate of the workpiece zero - thus also the work
offset - is calculated. The tool radius is automatically included in the
calculation.
Example: Setpoint position workpiece edge X0 = -50
Approach direction +
Tool radius = 3mm
Work offset X = 53

! Repeat the process for the other two axes.

Measure corner

! Insert a 3D probe type tool in the spindle.

! Traverse the tool to near the workpiece corner you want to

measure.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the " Meas. workp." soft key.
Jog

Corner ! Press the "Corner" soft key.

! Select the desired offset where you want to save the zero position.

-or-

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-70 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

Work offset ! Press soft key "Work offset".

-and-
! Position the cursor on the desired work offset.

-and-
In manual ! Press soft key "In manual".

! Select the position of the workpiece corner you want to measure.

! Specify setpoints X0 and Y0 of the workpiece corner you want to

measure.
The setpoint position corresponds, e.g. to the dimension
specifications of the workpiece corner from the workpiece
drawing.

! Traverse the tool to near the first measuring point P1.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
The automatic measuring process is started. Travel to measuring
point 1 is initiated at the measuring feedrate specified via machine
data; the return path back to the starting position is traveled in rapid
traverse.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The position of measuring point P1 is saved.

! Traverse the tool to near the second measuring point P2.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
! Repeat this process for measuring points P3 and P4.
With a orthogonal workpiece you only need to approach 3
measuring points to determine its home position.

Set position ! Press the "Set position" soft key.

The work offset and rotation α0 are calculated. The tool radius is
automatically included in the calculation.

If you would like to achieve a greater accuracy, repeat the measuring

process again. At the second measuring pass the angle α0 calculated
in the first measuring pass is taken into account when the measuring
points are approached, so that the tool can now approach the
measuring points at a right angle.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-71
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

Measure hole

! Insert a 3D probe type tool in the spindle.

! Move the tool until it is positioned in the approximate center of the

hole.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the " Meas. workp." soft key.
Jog

Hole ! Press the "Hole" soft key.

! Select the desired offset where you want to save the zero position.

-or-
Work offset ! Press soft key "Work offset".

-and-
! Position the cursor on the desired work offset.

-and-
In manual ! Press soft key "In manual".

! Specify setpoints X0 and Y0 of the hole center point.

! Enter the diameter of the hole.

This limits the area for rapid traverse. If you do not enter a
diameter, the probe will approach the hole center point at
measurement feedrate right from the starting point.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
The tool automatically contacts 4 points in succession around the
inside wall of the hole.
Then the specified setpoint position is saved as the new zero point.
The tool radius is automatically included in the calculation.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-72 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

Measure spigot

! Insert a 3D probe type tool in the spindle.

! Move the tool until it is positioned above the approximate center of

the spigot.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the " Meas. workp." soft key.
Jog

Spigot ! Press the "Spigot" soft key.

! Select the desired offset where you want to save the zero position.

-or-
Work offset ! Press soft key "Work offset".

-and-
! Position the cursor on the desired work offset.

-and-
In manual ! Press soft key "In manual".

! Specify setpoints X0 and Y0 of the spigot center point.

! Enter the diameter of the spigot.

This limits the area for rapid traverse. If you do not enter a
diameter, the probe will approach the hole center point at
measurement feedrate right from the starting point.

! Specify the infeed depth DZ of the tool.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
The tool automatically contacts 4 points in succession around the
outside wall of the spigot.
Then the specified setpoint position is saved as the new zero point.
The tool radius is automatically included in the calculation.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-73
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

2.4.3 Calibrate electronic measuring tool

When the electronic measuring tools are loaded in the spindle, often
clamping tolerance occurs. This can lead to measurement errors.
In addition, you need to determine the trigger point of the measuring
tool in relation to the spindle center (trigger point).
Therefore, you need to calibrate the electronic measuring tool. The
radius is calibrated in a hole, the length is calibrated on a surface. For
the hole, you can use hole in the workpiece or use a ring gauge. The
radius of the measuring tool must be contained in the tool list.

Calibrate radius

! Insert a 3D probe type tool in the spindle.

! Move the tool into the hole and position it in the approximate
center of the hole.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the " Meas. workp." soft key.
Jog

Calibration ! Press the "Calibration probe" and "Radius" soft keys.

Radius
probe
! Enter the diameter of the hole.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
The calibration process is initiated. First the exact hole center point is
determined. Then the 4 trigger points on the inside wall of the hole are
approached.

Calibrate length

! Insert a 3D probe type tool in the spindle.

! Position the tool above the surface.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-74 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.4 Measure workpiece zero

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the " Meas. workp." soft key.
Jog

Calibration Length ! Press the "Calibration probe" and "Length" soft keys.
probe
! Specify reference point Z0 of the surface, e.g. of the workpiece or
the machine table.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
The calibration process is initiated. The length of the measuring tool is
calculated and entered in the tool list.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-75
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.5 Measure tools

2.5 Measure tools

The various tool geometries must be considered when executing a
program. These are stored as tool offset data in the tool list. Each time
the tool is called, the control considers the tool offset data.
You can determine the tool offset data, i.e. the length and radius or
diameter, either manually or automatically (per measuring probe).

2.5.1 Measure tool manually

When you measure manually, you traverse the tool manually to the
workpiece. ShopMill uses the known position of the tool carrier
reference point and the workpiece dimensions to calculate the tool
length and the radius or diameter.

Depending on the setting in a machine data, you can measure the

radius or the diameter of the tool.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Measure length

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the "Measure tool" soft key.

Jog

Length ! Press the "Length manual" soft key.

manual >

Tools
! Press the "Tools" soft key.

! Select the tool to be measured from the tool list.

In ! Press the "In manual" soft key.

manual
The tool is entered in the "Length manual" display.

! Select the cutting edge number D and the duplo number DP for
the tool.

! Approach the workpiece in the Z direction and perform scratching

(see Section "Traversing the Machine Axes").

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-76 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.5 Measure tools

Measure tool length

! Specify the setpoint position Z0 of the workpiece edge.

Set ! Press the "Set length" soft key.

length
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.

If you do not want to use the workpiece to determine the tool length,
but a test socket instead, no work offset may be selected or the basic
work offset must be zero. The basic offset is also displayed in the
parameter screen form to allow you to check the value.

Measure radius/diameter
! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the "Measure tool" soft key.
Jog

Radius Dia. ! Press the "Radius manual" or "Dia. manual" soft key.
manual > or manual >

Tools
! Press the "Tools" soft key.

! Select the tool to be measured from the tool list.

In ! Press the "In manual" soft key.

manual
The tool is entered in the "Radius/diameter manual" screenform.

! Select the cutting edge number D and the duplo number DP for
the tool.

! Approach the workpiece in the X or Y direction and perform

scratching (see Section "Traversing the machine axes").

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-77
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.5 Measure tools

Measure radius/diameter

! Specify the setpoint position X0 or Y0 of the workpiece edge.

Set Set ! Press the soft key "Set radius" or "Set diameter".
radius or diameter
The tool radius or diameter is calculated automatically and entered in
the tool list.

2.5.2 Measuring tools with a probe

For automatic measurement, you determine the length and radius or

diameter of the tool with the aid of a measuring probe (table probe
system). ShopMill uses the known positions of the tool carrier
reference point and measuring probe to calculate the tool offset data.

Before you measure a tool automatically, you must enter the

approximate tool geometry data (length and radius or diameter) in the
tool list and calibrate the probe.

Depending on the setting in a machine data, you can measure the

radius or the diameter of the tool.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

When measuring, you can consider a lateral or longitudinal offset V. If

the longest point of the tool is not located at the outside of the tool, or
the widest point not at the base of the tool, you can store this
difference in the offset.

Lateral offset Longitudinal offset

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-78 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.5 Measure tools

Measure length

! Position the tool near the measuring probe so that it can be

approached without collision.

Measure tool length

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the "Measure tool" soft key.

Jog

Length ! Press the "Length Auto" soft key.

Auto >

Tools
! Press the "Tools" soft key.

! Select the tool to be measured from the tool list.

In ! Press soft key "In manual".

manual
The tool is entered in the "Length Auto" screenform.

! Select the cutting edge number D and the duplo number DP for
the tool.

! If necessary, enter the lateral offset V.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
The automatic measuring process is started. The tool length is
calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
The measuring process depends on the settings of the machine
manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-79
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.5 Measure tools

Measure radius/diameter
! Position the tool near the measuring probe so that it can be
approached without collision.

Measure radius/diameter

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the "Measure tool" soft key.

Jog

Radius Dia. ! Then press the soft key "Radius Auto" or "Dia. Auto".
Auto > or Auto >

! Press the "Tools" soft key.

Tools
! Select the tool to be measured from the tool list.

In ! Press soft key "In manual".

manual
The tool is entered in the "Radius/diameter Auto" screenform.

! Select the cutting edge number D and the duplo number DP for
the tool.

! Enter the longitudinal offset V if necessary.

! Press the "Cycle Start" soft key.

Cycle Start
The automatic measuring process is started. The tool radius or
diameter is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
The measuring process depends on settings made by the machine
manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-80 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.5 Measure tools

2.5.3 Calibrate measuring probe

If you want to measure your tool automatically, you must first

determine the position of the probe on the machine table with
reference to the machine zero.

Mechanical probes are typically cube-shaped or cylindrical. Install the

probe in the working area of the machine (on the machine table) and
align it in relation to the machining axes.

You must use a miU-type calibration tool to calibrate the probe. You
must enter the length and radius/diameter of the tool beforehand in the
tool list.

! Move the calibration tool until it is positioned over the approximate

center of the measuring surface of the probe.

! In "Machine Manual" mode, select the "Measure tool" soft key.

Jog

Calibrate ! Press the "Calibrate probe" soft key.

probe
! Choose whether you want to calibrate the length or the length and
the diameter.

Calibrate length only Calibrate length and diameter

! Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
The calibration is automatically executed at the measuring feedrate.
The current distance measurements between the machine zero and
probe are calculated and stored in an internal data area.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-81
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.6 Machining in Manual mode

2.6 Machining in Manual mode

2.6.1 Change settings

Operating sequence

Select with soft key

Jog

Default settings are entered in this menu for

• Return plane
The return plane is the position above the workpiece which is
approached in rapid traverse during manual face milling.
• Safety clearance
The safety clearance is the distance between the tool tip and the
workpiece surface. This position is approached in rapid traverse.
The programmed cycle - face milling - is then executed at the
programmed machining feedrate.

• Setup feedrate
The feedrate at which the axes are traversed in manual mode.
• Variable increment size
If in manual mode you want to traverse the axes using variable
increment sizes instead of the predefined one, you can enter the
required step size here.
Example application: If you want a step size of 500µm
(= 0.5mm) specify 500.

These settings remain valid until you change them.

These settings are made for the programs in the program header.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-82 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.6 Machining in Manual mode

2.6.2 Positioning

Operating sequence

In Manual mode, you can move the axes to certain positions for the
purpose of performing simple machining operations.

Select with soft keys

Jog

Select the axis/axes that you wish to

move and enter its/their target position/s.
Enter your selected setting for feedrate F,
e.g. 1000mm/min.

Rapid Alternatively, you can select this soft key to move the axes in rapid
traverse traverse.

The axes are moved to the specified target position when you press
Cycle Start "Cycle Start".

2.6.3 Face milling

Function

You can use this cycle to face mill any workpiece. The cycle
distinguishes between rough cutting (repeated end milling of surface
with depth infeed inside workpiece) and finish cutting (single end mill
operation on surface with retraction of mill and depth infeed outside
workpiece).

Select with soft keys

Jog

Then select the desired direction of machining and enter parameter

settings in input screenform.

Please also note instructions regarding face milling

in Section "Programming – Face Milling".
Confirm your inputs with soft key "OK"

and go to the program view in the Manual area:

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-83
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.6 Machining in Manual mode

Example of face milling in the program view

Press the "Cycle Start" key to start the "Face milling" cycle.
Cycle Start

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-84 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.7 MDI mode

2.7 MDI mode

Function

You can write and execute programs block by block in G code in "MDI"
(Manual Data Input) mode. To do this, you enter specific movements
as individual program blocks in the control via the keyboard.

The "MDI" program view displays position, feedrate, spindle and tool
values as well as the contents of the MDI program.

Example of a program in the "MDI" program view

Select with soft key

MDI

Enter the required G code.

Start program
The control executes the blocks you have entered when you press the
Cycle Start "Cycle Start" key.

Delete program
Delete Programs written in MDI mode are automatically deleted as soon as
MDI prog.
they have finished running. Alternatively, you can delete them by
selecting soft key "Delete MDI program".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-85
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.8 Automatic mode

2.8 Automatic mode

In the "Machine Auto" operating mode, you can execute machining

Auto programs and monitor the progress of the current machining operation
online on the screen.

Preconditions The preconditions for executing machining programs are as follows:

• You have already synchronized the control measuring system with
the machine (i.e. "approached" reference points).
• You have already written the relevant machining program.
• You have checked or entered the necessary offset values, e.g.
work offsets and tool offsets.
• The required safety interlocks are already active.

Example of program view in "Machine Auto"

Programs produced with an earlier version of ShopMill can also be

executed in the current version of ShopMill. If an older ShopMill
program is executed once in the current ShopMill version, it is deemed
to be a current ShopMill program version.

You can also execute a Version-6.3 ShopMill program in ShopMill 6.2,

provided that you consider the following points:
• If the machining type "Edge finishing" is programmed for a
longitudinal groove in ShopMill 6.3, the parameter is replaced by
"Roughing" in ShopMill 6.2.
• The functions "Deep drilling" and "Cicumferential slot" programmed
under ShopMill 6.3 only run in ShopMill 6.2 if you check the
function parameters again in ShopMill 6.2 and confirm these.
When a ShopMill program with Version 6.3 is executed in ShopMill
6.2, it is deemed to be a Version-6.2 program.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-86 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.8 Automatic mode

2.8.1 Switchover between "T, F, S", "G functions" and "Auxiliary functions" displays

If while machining the workpiece you want to know e.g. whether the
tool nose radius compensation is active or which unit of measurement
is being used, activate G function display or auxiliary functions.

16 different G groups are displayed under "G function". Within a G

group, only the G function that is currently active in the NC is
displayed.

Alternatively, all G groups with all their associated G functions are

displayed under "All G func.".

The auxiliary functions also include OEM M and H functions which

pass parameters to the PLC and trigger the reactions defined by the
machine manufacturer there.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

It is possible to display up to five M functions and three H functions.

When executing a ShopMill program, you can display the G functions

currently active in the NC too, as the ShopMill functions are converted
to G code internally.

G function ! Select the "G function" soft key in "Machine Manual" or "Machine
Auto" operating mode.

The G functions that are currently active at program execution are

displayed within a G group instead of parameters T, F and S.
If you press the "G function" soft key again, status display "T, F, S"
appears again.

-or-

All ! Press the "All G func." soft key.

G func.
Now all G groups and G functions are displayed instead of the T, F
and S parameters. If you press the "All G func." soft key again, status
display "T, F, S" appears again.

-or-

Auxiliary ! Press the "Auxiliary function" soft key.

function
The auxiliary functions that are currently active at program execution
are displayed instead of parameters T, F and S. If you press the "Aux.
func." soft key again, status display "T, F, S" appears again.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-87
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.8 Automatic mode

2.8.2 Select a program for execution

Operating sequence

! Press the "Program" key or "Program manager" soft key.

-or- The directory overview is displayed.

! Position the cursor on the directory where you want to select a

program.

! Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- The program overview is displayed.

! Position the cursor on the program you want to execute.

Execute ! Press soft key "Execute".

ShopMill automatically changes to "Machine Auto" operating mode

and uploads the program.

-or-

! Press the "Program" key or "Program manager" soft key.

-or- The directory overview is displayed.

! Position the cursor on the directory where you want to select a

program.

! Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- The program overview is displayed.

! Position the cursor on the program you want to execute.

! Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The
machining plan is displayed.

! Position the cursor on the program block you want to start

program execution from.

! Press soft key "Execute".

ShopMill automatically changes to "Machine Auto" manual mode,

loads the program and conducts a block search until it reaches the
selected program block (see Section "Enter a program at any selected
point").

If you select a program for execution for the first time and it contains
cycles "Stock removal against the contour" or "Contour pocket", the
individual stock removal steps are calculated for the contour pocket.
This process may take several seconds depending on the complexity
of the contour.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-88 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.8 Automatic mode

2.8.3 Start/stop/abort program

Function

Shows how to start/stop programs that are loaded in "Machine Auto"

operating mode and resume program execution after abnormal
program termination.

If the program is loaded in "Machine Auto" operating mode, and

"Automatic" is activated on the machine control panel, you can also
start the program from any operating area and not in "Machine Auto"
operating mode.
This start option must be activated in a machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Precondition No alarms are currently active.

The program is selected.
The feedrate enable signal is set.
The spindle enable signal is set.

Operating sequence

Start machining
! Press the "Cycle Start" key.
Cycle Start
The program is started and executed from the start or from the
selected program block onwards.

Stop execution
! Press the "Cycle Stop" key.
Cycle Stop
Machining stops immediately, individual program blocks are not
executed to the end. At the next start, execution is resumed at the
same location where it stopped.

Stop execution
! Press the "Reset" key.
Reset
Execution of the program is aborted. At the next start, execution
begins again from the start of the program.

Start execution from the The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" operating mode and
operating area "Automatic" operating mode is activated on the machine control panel.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-89
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.8 Automatic mode

! Press the "Start" key.

Cycle Start
The program is started and is executed from the start. The interface of
the previously selected operating area still remains visible.

2.8.4 Interrupt program

Retract from contour

After you have interrupted a program ("NC Stop") in Automatic mode
(e.g. in order to take a measurement on the workpiece and correct the
tool wear values or after tool breakage), you can retract the tool from
the contour in "Machine Manual" mode. In such cases, ShopMill stores
the coordinates of the interruption point and displays the differences in
distance traveled by the axes in "Machine Manual" mode as a "Repos"
(= Reposition) offset in the actual value window.

For details of how to traverse machine axes, please refer to Section

"Traverse machine axes".

Reapproach contour
The "Repos" function repositions the tool on the workpiece contour
after traversal of the machine axes during a program interruption in
Automatic mode.

Operating sequence

Precondition "Machine Manual" operating mode is selected.

The axes have been moved away from the point of interruption.

Selects the "Repos" machine function.

Repos

Select the axis that you wish to move and

X ...

then press the "-" or "+" key.

+
You will not be able to move the axis beyond the point of interruption.
The feed override is operative.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-90 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.8 Automatic mode

Warning

The rapid traverse override key is active.

Non-adjusted Repos offsets will be adjusted automatically with
program feedrate and linear interpolation when you switch over to
Automatic and press "NC Start".

2.8.5 Start execution at specific program location

If you only want to execute a specific program section on the machine,

you do not have to start program execution right from the beginning;
instead you can start at a specific program block or text.

If you want to start program execution from a specific text, ShopMill

will search for it in the program.
After the start block or text is specified, ShopMill then calculates the
exact starting point for program execution.
In ShopMill cycles, the calculation is always carried out on the end
point of the block. When calculating the starting point of all other
ShopMill blocks and G code blocks, you can choose between four
options.

1. Calculation to contour:
During a block search, ShopMill makes the same calculations as
when executing a program. The program is executed from the
beginning of the target block in an identical manner to normal
program execution.

2. Calculation to end point:

During a block search, ShopMill makes the same calculations as
when executing a program. The program is executed from the end
of the target block or from the next programmed position of the
target block.

3. Without calculation
ShopMill performs no calculations during block search, i.e. the
calculation is skipped up to the target block. The internal control
values are set to the same values as prior to the block search.
This option is only available for programs that consist of G code
blocks only.

4. External - without calculation

This variant is the same as for calculation at end point. However,
subroutines that are called via EXTCALL are skipped during
calculation. Similarly, the calculation is skipped up to the target
block for G code programs that are executed fully via external
drives (floppy disk/network drive).
This accelerates the calculation.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-91
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.8 Automatic mode

Notice
Modal functions not included in the calculated program section are not
considered for the program section to be executed. This means that
you should select a target block for the variants "Without calculation"
and "External – without calculation" from which point on all information
required for machining is included.

Select ShopMill cycle

! Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section

"Select a program for execution").

! Position the cursor on the desired target block.

Start ! Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" soft keys.
search run
! If you are using a program with chained program blocks and
several technology blocks, select the desired technology block in
the "Search" window.
This prompt does not appear with single program blocks.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

! With chained program blocks, specify the number of the desired

starting position.
This prompt does not appear with single program blocks.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

! Press the "Start" key.

Cycle Start
ShopMill carries out all necessary default settings.

! Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. Then the workpiece is
machined from the start of the target block.

You can cancel the search run by pressing the "Reset" key.
Reset

Select other ShopMill

block or G code block
! Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section
"Select a program for execution").

! Position the cursor on the desired target block.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-92 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.8 Automatic mode

! Select soft key "Block search".

To Without ! Select a calculation option.

contour ... calculation
! Press the "Start" key.
Cycle Start
ShopMill carries out all necessary default settings.

! Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. Then the program is
executed from the start or end of the target block, according to which
calculation option is selected.

You can cancel the search run by pressing the "Reset" key.
Reset

Search text
! Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section
"Select a program for execution").

Search ! Press the "Block search" and "Search" soft keys.

! Specify the text you want to search for.

! Select whether to start the search at the beginning of the program

or from the current cursor position.

Search ! Select soft key "Search".

The program block where the searched text occurs is highlighted.

Continue ! Press the "Continue search" soft key if you want to continue the
search
search.

! Press the "Start" key.

Cycle Start
ShopMill carries out all necessary default settings.

! Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then
machined from this target block onwards.

You can cancel the search run by pressing the "Reset" key.
Reset

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-93
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.8 Automatic mode

2.8.6 Program control

If you want to check the result while machining a workpiece, you can
stop the machining process at locations that are specially designed for
stopping (programmed stop).

If, however, you do not want to execute specific machining steps

programmed with G code at every program pass, select these blocks
separately (skip G code blocks). This is not possible with ShopMill
blocks.

Programmed stop

! Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section

"Select a program for execution").

! Press the soft key "Prog. cntrl".

Program- ! Press the "Programmed stop" soft key.

med stop
! Press the "Start" key.
Cycle Start
Execution of the program is started. The program run stops at every
block for which "programmed stop" was defined (see Section
"Miscellaneous Functions").

! Press the "Cycle Start" key again every time.

Cycle Start
Program execution is resumed.
Program- ! Press the "Programmed stop" soft key if you want to execute the
med stop program without programmed stop. (The soft key is deselected
again.)

Skip G code blocks

! Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section
"Select a program for execution").

! Press the soft key "Prog. cntrl".

Skip ! Press the "Skip" soft key.

! Press the "Start" key.

Cycle Start
Execution of the program is started. G code blocks that start with a "/"
(slash) character preceding the block number are not executed.

Skip ! Press the "Skip" soft key again if the selected G code blocks are
to be processed again the next time the program is executed.
(The soft key is deselected again.)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-94 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.8 Automatic mode

2.8.7 Program testing

If you want to prevent any incorrect machining of the workpiece the

first time the program is executed on the machine, you can test the
program first without moving the machine axes.

ShopMill will then check the program for the following errors:

• Geometric incompatibilities
• Missing data
• Non-executable instruction sequences and jumps
• Violation of working area

ShopMill automatically detects syntax errors when it loads a program

in "Machine Auto" operating mode.

Whether ShopMill executes auxiliary functions (M functions and H

functions) of not during the program test depends on the settings
made by the machine manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

You can use the following functions for the program test:
• Stop execution with "programmed stop" (see Section "Control
Program")
• Graphic screen representation on screen (see Section
"Simultaneous recording before machining").

! Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section

"Select a program for execution").

! Press the soft key "Prog. cntrl".

Program ! Press the "Program test" soft key.

test
! Press the "Start" key.
Cycle Start

The program is tested without moving the machine axes.

Program ! Press the "Program test" soft key again if you want to deactivate
test the test status after you have executed the program. (The soft key
is deselected again.)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-95
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.8 Automatic mode

2.8.8 Simultaneous recording before machining

Function

The "Program test" function offers you the option of graphically

simulating a program run in Automatic mode before it is machined, i.e.
without moving the machine axes.

Simultaneous recording is a software option.

The graphic displays a workpiece as if it were being machined with a

cylindrical tool.

Status displays The status display in the graphic contains the following information:
• Current axis coordinates
• Block currently being processed.
• The processing time (in hours/minutes/seconds)
indicates the approximate time that would actually be required to
execute the machining program on the machine (incl. tool change).
The timer is stopped if the program is interrupted.

Operating sequence

Precondition The program is selected in "Machine Auto" mode.

Program Press the soft keys "Prog. cntrl" and "Program test".
test
If you select soft key "Dry run feedrate" as well, the programmed feed
Dry run
feedrate velocity is replaced by a dry run feedrate defined in a machine data.

Select soft key "Real-sim" and

start the program with "Cycle Start".

Cycle Start

You can still use the program control functions such as "Cycle Stop",
"Single block", "Feedrate override", etc.

Program When you press soft key "Program view", the display changes from
view the "Simultaneous recording" graphic to the program view in
Automatic mode. The system continues to record graphic data as a
background function.

You can return to the graphic display by pressing one of the following
soft keys:

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-96 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.8 Automatic mode

Plan view • plan view,

• representation in 3 planes or

• 3D representation (volume model).

Delete You can select soft key "Delete screen" to clear the machining
screen operation graphic which has already been recorded while the program
is executing. Recording of the machining operation will however
continue.

For further information about the principles and operation, please refer
to Section "Simulation".

2.8.9 Simultaneous recording during machining

Function

You can track the current machining operation on the machine tool
simultaneously by monitoring the graphic display on the control
screen.

Simultaneous recording is a software option.

Operating sequence

Precondition Program test and dry run feedrate must not be selected.

Select soft key "Real-sim" and

start the program with "Cycle Start".

Cycle Start

The "simultaneous recording" function can be switched on at any time

during machining.

An explanation of the functions available under "Simultaneous

recording" can be found in Sections "Simultaneous recording before
machining" and "Simulation".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-97
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.9 Execute a trial program run

2.9 Execute a trial program run

2.9.1 Single block

Function

When this function is active, the program is interrupted after every

block which initiates some operation on the machine (these do no
include arithmetic blocks).
Default setting The following defaults apply:
• A single block includes
• the whole machining operation in the case of drilling operations and
the machining operations on one plane in the case of pocket milling.

Select with soft key Single

block fine

"Single block fine" active When the "Single block fine" function is active, each individual drill
infeed and pocket milling motion is executed as a separate block.
Also, execution is stopped at the contour after every single contour
element.

Select with soft key Single

block fine

Single block via machine

control panel

Activate the "Single block" key in "Machine Auto" mode. It will allow
Single Block you to process a program block by block. The appropriate LED on the
machine control panel lights up to indicate that single block mode is
active.

If you have selected single block machining,

• the text "Stop: Block ended in single block" is displayed in the
channel operating message line when the program is interrupted
• the current program block will not be executed until you press the
"Cycle Start" key,
• the program stops automatically after a block has been processed,
• the following block will be processed when you press the "Cycle
Start" key again.

Deselect single block mode

You can deselect the function by pressing the "Single block" key
Single Block again.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-98 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.9 Execute a trial program run

2.9.2 Basic block display

If you want to obtain further information about the axis positions and
important G functions on insertion or during execution, you can show
the basic display.

You can use the basic display both in test mode and during actual
processing of the workpiece at the machine. All G code commands
that initiate a function at the machine for the currently active program
block are displayed in the "Basic block" window:
• Absolute axis positions
• G functions in the first G group
• Further modal G functions
• Further programmed addresses
• M functions

The "Basic block display" function must be set up by the machine

manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

! Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section

"Select a program for execution").

Basic block
! Select soft key "Basic block".

! Press the "Single Block" key if you want to execute the program
Single Block blockwise.

! Start execution of the program is started.

Cycle Start
The precise axis positions, G functions, etc. are displayed in the
"Basic block" window for the currently active program block.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-99
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.9 Execute a trial program run

2.9.3 Correct program

Function

As soon as the control detects a syntax error in the program, it

interrupts the program and displays the syntax error in the alarm line.
In the event of such errors (program Stop status), you can correct the
program in the program editor.

Operating sequence

Precondition The program is selected in "Machine Auto" mode.

The program is in the Stop or Reset state.

Select with soft key

The program editor appears on the screen.

If an error has occurred, the errored block is marked. Press the "Input"
key and then correct the block.

Press soft key "Accept" to transfer the correction to the current

program.

After you have made the correction, you can continue processing by
Cycle Start pressing this soft key and "Cycle Start".

• Cycle Stop status:

You can only modify blocks that have not yet been executed or
read in by the NC.
• Reset status:
You can modify any block.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-100 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10 Tools and tool offsets

ShopMill offers you a tool management facility based on the following

lists:
• Tool list
• Tool wear list
• Magazine list

Enter the tools and their offset data in the tool list or tool wear list. You
will be able to identify in the magazine list which magazine locations
are disabled or not.

Depending on individual requirements, a tool list might consist of the

following:
• A tool change involving
− a spindle or dual gripper
− or a spindle with dual gripper
• at least one tool magazine
• and tools that are not assigned to any tool magazine.

For details of the functionality of your tool management system, please

refer to the machine manufacturer's instruction manual.
The different lists can be adapted by the machine manufacturer if
necessary.

Tool list The tool list displays all tools and their offset data stored as a tool data
block in the NC, irrespective of whether or not they are assigned to a
magazine location. The tool list offers you all commonly used tools.
You can assign geometric and technological tool data to tool types.
Various different examples of each tool might exist to which you can
assign the current offset data of the tool being used.

You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list.
When a tool is loaded, it is moved from its storage location to a
magazine location. When it is unloaded, it is removed from the
magazine and taken back to a storage location.
This loading and unloading of tool magazines is defined in a machine
data.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-101
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

Example of a tool list with variable location assignment

The main display of the "Tools" operating area shows the current tool
list with the following data:

Location Location number

The following designations/symbols are used for:
• The spindle location
• The locations for gripper 1 and gripper 2 (applies only when a
spindle with dual gripper is used)
• The magazine location numbers
If the configuration includes more than one magazine, the
magazine number is specified first followed by the location number
in the magazine:
e.g. 1/10 = Magazine 1 with location number 10
2/5 = Magazine 2 with location number 5
• Tools that are not assigned to a magazine in the tool list are stored
in a location without location number.
This allows management of tools that are not actually contained in
the tool magazine.

Type Tool type

Depending on the tool type (represented by a symbol), only certain tool
offset data are enabled.
Tool name The tool is identified by means of its name. You can enter the name as
text or a number (see Section "Change tool names").
DP Duplo number of twin tool (replacement tool)
(D No.) cutting edge Tool offset data length, diameter/radius and angle for the selected tool
cutting edge.
The "H" column is displayed only for ISO dialect0-M programs. Every
H number of an ISO dialect0-M program must be assigned to a tool
offset data record.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-102 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

N Number of teeth on a mill

Spindle direction of rotation

Coolant supply 1 and 2 can be activated/deactivated (e.g. internal and

external cooling)
Tool-spec. fct 1...4 Other tool-specific functions such as additional coolant supply,
monitoring functions for speed, tool breakage, etc.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The "Details" soft key displays the additional parameters "Rounding

radius" or "Angle" for 3D tapered milling tools.

Tool wear list You can adapt the tool geometry (length and radius/diameter) to the
wear-induced geometry in the tool wear list.
You can also set the following monitoring functions for a tool.
• Monitoring of actual time of use (service life, number of
workpieces)
• Monitoring of number of tool load operations
• Other tool status data (disable tool, tool in fixed location, oversized
tool)

Tool magazine The magazine locations with tools are specified in the magazine list.
The list also indicates whether the magazine location is disabled
(location disable) and the properties (tool status) assigned to the tools.

Fixed/variable location You can set a machine data to determine whether all tools must have
assignment a variable or fixed location assignment in the magazine.
If you select a variable location assignment, the tools are taken to the
next available space in the magazine after a tool change. With a fixed
location assignment, the tools are always taken back to the location
assigned specifically to them.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instruction manual for
details about location assignments in the tool magazine.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-103
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

Graphical display of tools In addition to the list of tools, you can also display the tools and
and magazine locations magazine locations in a dynamic graphic display. The tools are
displayed in the order in the list with the correct proportions.
The graphical display must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Graphical display of tools and magazine locations

The following applies for the graphical display:

• Small milling tools and 3-D tools are displayed as end mills, large
ones as hobs.
• If a tool is too long for the display, the maximum possible length is
shown.
• Oversized tools are truncated on the left and right sides.
• Tools that are not located in the magazine are displayed without
toolholder.
• Disabled tools or magazine locations are marked as follows:

Disabled tool:

Disabled magazine location:

• The data of the relevant tool nose selected are used for the
display.
If there is no tool nose for a tool in the selected view, the data of
the first tool nose are used.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-104 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.1 Create a new tool

Function

You can enter tools and the associated compensation data directly
into the tool list or simply read existing tool data outside the tool
management (see Section "Backup/restore tool/zero data").

If you want to enter a new tool directly into the tool list, ShopMill offers
a range of conventional tool types. The tool type determines which
geometry data are required and how they will be calculated. The
following common tool types are available:

Operating sequence

Select with soft keys New

tool

Use the cursor keys to select the tool location you want

3D and confirm your selected tool type with the soft key.
Cutter
... tools

A new tool is then created.

3D tools In addition to the geometry data in the tool list, you must specify
further parameters for 3D tools.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-105
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

Type Name Additional parameter

110 Cylindrical die mill -
111 Ball end mill Rounding radius
121 End mill with corner rounding Rounding radius
155 Bevel cutter mill Angle for tapered tools
156 Tapered mill with corner rounding Rounding radius, angle for tapered tools
157 Tapered die mill Angle for tapered tools

Details
Press the "Details" soft key and enter the rounding radius or angle for
tapered milling tools.

2.10.2 Create several cutting edges per tool

With tools with several cutting edges, each cutting edge is given its
own correction data set. You can create up to 9 cutting edges for each
tool.

You must specify an H number for ISO programs (e.g. ISO dialect 1).
This corresponds to a particular tool offset block.

You create tools with multiple cutting edges in the tool list as described
above and enter the compensation data for the 1st tool edge.

Cutting New cutting ! Then press soft keys "Cutting edges" and "New cutting edge".
edges > edge
Instead of the input fields for the 1st cutting edge, the compensation
data input fields for the 2nd cutting edge are now displayed in the tool
list.

! Enter the compensation data for the 2nd cutting edge.

! Repeat the procedure if you want to create more cutting edge

compensation data.
Delete cut- ! Press the "Delete cutting edge" soft key if you want to delete the
ting edge
cutting edge compensation data for a cutting edge.
You can only delete the data for the cutting edge with the highest
tool edge number.

With soft keys "D No. +" and "D No. –" you can display the
D No. + D No. –
compensation data for the cutting edge with the next higher/lower tool
edge number.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-106 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.3 Change the tool name

A newly created tool in the tool list is automatically assigned the name
of the selected tool group. You may change this designation as you
please to
• a tool name, e.g. "face_mill_120mm" or
• a tool number, e.g. "1" .
A tool name may contain a maximum of 17 characters. You can use
any letters, digits, the underscore symbol "_", dots "." and slashes "/".

2.10.4 Create a replacement tool

A replacement tool is one that can be employed to perform the same

machining operation as a tool that already exists (e.g. as a
replacement after tool breakage).

When you create a tool as a replacement, you must give it the same
name as an existing comparable tool.

Confirm the name with the "Input" key. The duplo number of the
replacement tool will be incremented by 1 automatically.

The order in which replacement tools are inserted in the spindle is

determined by duplo number DP.

2.10.5 Manual tools

Manual tools are tools which are needed during a machining operation
but which exist only in the tool list and not in the tool magazine. Tools
of this type have to be loaded and unloaded to and from the spindle by
hand.

The "manual tool" function must be set up by the machine

manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-107
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.6 Tool offsets

Function

Why do we need tool You do not have to take tool diameters and lengths into account when
offsets? writing machining programs.
You can program workpiece dimensions directly, e.g. as specified in
the production drawing.
When a workpiece is machined, the tool paths are controlled as a
function of the relevant tool geometry in such a way that the
programmed contour can be produced with any tool employed.

Tool path

Contour

The control system corrects Enter the tool data separately in the "Tool list" and "Tool wear" tables.
the traversing path When writing the program, you merely need to call the tool you
require.
While the program is being processed, the control fetches the offset
data it requires from the tool table and corrects the tool path
individually for different tools.

Programmed contour

Corrected
tool path

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-108 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

What type of tool offsets The offset memory of a tool includes the following:
are available? • Tool type
The tool type determines which tool data are required and how they
must be calculated (e.g. drill, centering tool, mill).
• Total size: Length, radius, angle (drill)
These comprise several components (geometry, wear). The control
performs calculations on the components to obtain a final size (e.g.
total length, total radius). The relevant total dimension becomes
valid as soon as the offset memory is activated.

Length

Radius

Tool length This value compensates the differences in length between the tools
compensation you use.
The tool length is interpreted to be the distance between the toolholder
reference point and the tool tip. This measured length is entered in the
tool list.
The control uses this measurement and the wear values to calculate
travel movements in the infeed direction.

Tool radius "Contour" and "Tool path" are not identical. The mill or tool edge
compensation radius center point must travel along an equidistant to the contour.
For this purpose, the programmed tool center point path is
automatically displaced by the controller – as a function of radius and
machining direction – in such a way that the tool edge travels exactly
along the programmed contour.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-109
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

The tool radius must be entered in the tool list. While a program is
running, the control fetches the radii it requires and uses them to
calculate the tool path.

Equidistant

Offset values for Infeed G eom etry in plan e

Radius

Z Length in Z
milling tool (example) Radius in X/Y
F
Y Length in Y F - Toolholder
Radius in Z/X reference point

X Length in X Length
Radius in Y/Z

Offset values for Infeed Geometry in plane Radius

drill (example) Z Length in Z F

F
Y Length in Y Angle

Length
X Length in X
F - Toolholder reference point

Offset values are used in the simulation display and programming

graphic for the following tools:

• Drill: Angle and radius/diameter

• Centering tool: Radius/diameter

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-110 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.7 Special tool functions

Function

You can assign other functions to tool types in the tool list.

Number of teeth N Specify the number of teeth in this parameter. Parameter N is tool-
dependent and can be applied only for milling tools. The control
system calculates feedrate F internally if the feed is set in mm/tooth in
the program.

Using the "Alternat." soft key, you can activate and deactivate the
spindle direction of rotation (CCW/CW) in parameter "Spindle".

The spindle rotates in the Select with soft

clockwise direction of rotation. key
The spindle rotates in the
counterclockwise direction of
rotation.
The spindle is stopped.

Use parameters "coolant 1" and "coolant 2" if you want to supply
coolant for the tool, e.g. for internal and external cooling.

Switch coolant ON: Select with soft key

Do not switch coolant

ON:

Tool-specific functions You can also assign another four machine-specific actions to a tool.
You can activate or deactivate these functions using the "Alternat."
soft key. Tool-specific functions might include, for example, a 3rd
coolant supply or a tool breakage monitor.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-111
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.8 Create tool wear data

The wear data for an existing tool must be entered in the tool wear list.

Select with soft key

The following menu will appear on your screen:

Example of a tool wear list with variable location assignment

Allowances for In the tool wear list enter the delta values for length (∆length) and
length and radii radius (∆radius) / diameter (∆∅) for the tools.
Please note that
• a positive delta value signifies allowance (e.g. for subsequent finish
cuts) and
• a negative delta value signifies undersize (tool wear)

Radius

Radius
∆ R<0
Length
∆ R>0

∆ L<0 ∆L>0

∆L= ∆ Length ∆R= ∆Radius

Allowances/undersizes for a corner radius mill

The correction values entered in tables "Tool list" and "Tool wear"
become operative immediately a tool is called and inserted in the

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-112 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

spindle.

2.10.9 Tool monitoring

You can assign the following tool monitoring functions and features to
every tool in the tool wear list:
• Tool life
• No. of loadings
• Other tool properties
− Disable tool
− Tool in fixed location
− Oversized tool

The tool monitoring functions are activated via a machine data.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select with soft key

Tool life T The tool life function monitors how long a tool is used with machining
feed in minutes. If the remaining tool life is = 0, the tool is disabled.
The tool can no longer be used at the next change. A replacement tool
is inserted in its place, if one is available. Tool life monitoring always
refers to the selected tool cutting edge.

No. of loadings C The number of times that a tool may be loaded in the spindle to
perform a machining operation must be entered in this parameter. If
the number of spindle loading operations ("no. of loadings") has
reached zero, the tool is disabled.

Prewarning limit The prewarning limit is used for setting the tool life length or a
maximum tool count when the first warning is issued.

You can activate the type of monitoring you want in parameter T/C
after selecting the "Alternat." key. Enter the required setting in the
appropriate input fields.

Other tool properties You can assign the following additional properties to a tool:
• G: Disable tool, e.g. when the tool edge is worn.
• U: Tool oversized, i.e. half of each of the adjacent magazine
locations (to left and right of location in question) is disabled.
• P: Tool at fixed location, i.e. the tool is permanently assigned to a
particular magazine location (fixed-location-coded).

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-113
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

Select the function you require with the cursor keys and activate it with
soft key "Alternat.".

2.10.10 Magazine list

The magazine locations with tools are specified in the magazine list.
The list also indicates whether the magazine location is disabled
(location disable) and the properties (tool status) assigned to the tools.

Select with soft key

Example of magazine with variable assignment

Disable magazine location Magazine locations can be reserved or disabled for specific tools, e.g.
for oversized tools.

Select the magazine location you wish to disable.

Toggle with the "Alternat." soft key in the "Location disable" column
until a "G" (= disabled) is displayed in the correct field. This location is
now disabled. You will not be able to load any tool into this location.

Tool status The "Tool status" column lists the properties which have been
assigned to the currently active tool:
• G: Tool is disabled
• U: Tool is oversized
• P: Tool has a permanent location assignment

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-114 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.11 Delete a tool

Function

Tools can be deleted in the tool list.

Operating sequence

Select the tool that you wish to delete.

Delete Select the soft key "Delete tool" and confirm by selecting the "Delete"
Delete
tool button. The tool data for the selected tool are deleted. The magazine
location in which the tool was stored is enabled.

2.10.12 Change the tool type

Function

You can change a tool type into another tool type in the tool list.

Operating sequence

Select the tool that you wish to delete. The cursor is positioned on
input field "Type".

Press the "Alternat." key to select the new tool type.

The input fields for the new tool type are displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-115
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.13 Load a tool

Function

You can load a tool directly to the spindle or to another free location in
the magazine from the tool list.

Operating sequence

Precondition The machine data for tool management with loading/unloading is set.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select with soft key

or key

The "Tool list" menu is displayed on the screen.

Select the tool that you wish to delete.

Load Select soft key "Load".

A window headed "Empty location" containing the number of the first

free magazine location appears on the screen.
You can now enter a new location number

or

Spindle load the tool directly into the spindle.

Starts the loading operation.

The tool is loaded to the specified magazine location.

Aborts the loading operation.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-116 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.14 Unload a tool

Function

When a tool is unloaded, it is removed from the magazine and entered

in a store position in the tool list. The tool offset data block is not
deleted. The unloaded tool has no location number in the store
position.

Operating sequence

Precondition The machine data for tool management with loading/unloading is set.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select with soft key

or key

The "Tool list" menu is displayed on the screen.

Select a tool.

Unload Select soft key "Unload".

The tool is removed from the magazine and taken back to a storage
location.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-117
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.10 Tools and tool offsets

2.10.15 Sort tools

Function

If you are working with large or multiple tool magazines, it may be

helpful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. This
enables you to find tools faster in the lists.

Tools can be sorted in the tool list or tool wear list according to
magazine assignment, tool name (alphabetic) or tool type. When they
are sorted according to magazine assignment, empty magazine
locations are displayed as well.

Operating sequence

Select with soft key sort sort

> or >

to to to
magazine or name or type

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-118 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.11 Work offsets

2.11 Work offsets

After referencing, the actual value display of the axis coordinate is

based on the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate system
(Machine). Conversely, the program for machining the workpiece is
based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece coordinate system
(Work).
The machine zero and workpiece zero do not have to be identical. The
distance between the machine zero and workpiece zero may vary
depending on the workpiece type and clamping method. This work
offset is taken into account for program execution and can be
composed of several different offsets.

The offsets are added together as follows:

W Work

Transformation of coordinates
Tool offset

Work offset fine

Work offset coarse

Basic offset Machine

M

Work offsets

If the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, there is at

least one offset (basic offset or a work offset), where the position of
the workpiece zero is saved.

Basic offset The basic offset is a work offset that is always effective. If you have
not defined a basic offset, then it is zero. You determine the basic
offset via "Workpiece zero" (see Section "Measurement workpiece
zero") or "Set work offset" (see Section "Set a new position value").

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-119
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.11 Work offsets

Work offsets Work offsets (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) are made up of a coarse
and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any ShopMill
program (coarse and fine offsets are added together).
For example, you can save the workpiece zero in the coarse offset
and then store the offset that results between the old and new
workpiece zero when clamping a new workpiece.

The fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

How to define and call these work offsets is described in section

"Defining work offsets" and "Calling work offsets".

Coordinate You always program coordinate transformations for a specific ShopMill

transformation program. They are defined by:
• Offset
• Rotation
• Scaling
• Mirroring
(see Section "Defining a coordinate transformation")

Total offset The total offset is obtained from the sum of all offsets and coordinate
transformations.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-120 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.11 Work offsets

2.11.1 Defining a work offset

You enter work offsets (coarse and fine) directly in the work offset list.

The fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

The number of possible work offsets is set in a machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

! Press the soft key "Tools WOs" in the operating area "Work
offset".

The work offset list is opened.

! Position the cursor on the coarse or fine offset you want to define.

! Specify the coordinate of your choice for each axis. Use the cursor
keys to switch between axes.

-or-

Set X Set Z
! Press the soft key "Set X", "Set Y" or "Set Z" if you want to accept
... the position value of an axis from the position display for a coarse
offset.

-or-

Set ! Press the soft key "Set all" if you want to accept the position
all
values of all axes from the position display for a coarse offset.

The new coarse offset is set. The values for the fine offset are
incorporated and then deleted.

Delete ! Press the "Delete WO" soft key if you want to delete the values of
WO
the coarse and fine offsets simultaneously.

Additional With the "Additional axes" soft key, you can display two additional
axes
rotary axes and determine their offset. These additional axes must be
activated via machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-121
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.11 Work offsets

2.11.2 Work offset list

The individual work offsets and the total offset are all displayed in the
work offset list. The work offset that is currently active will have gray
background highlighting. Further, the current axis positions in the
machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system are
listed in the work offset list.

Work offset list

Basic offset
Base The coordinates of the basic offset are displayed.
You can change them here in the list.

Work offsets
WO1 ... WO3 The coordinates of the individual work offsets (1st line Coarse offset,
2nd line Fine offset) and the angle with which the coordinate system
may be rotated about an axis if necessary, are listed. You can change
this data here in the list (see Section "Defining work offsets").
The fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

You can display more work offsets by activating the "Page Down" key.

DRF The handwheel offsets generated for each axis are displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-122 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.11 Work offsets

Coordinate
transformation
Program The active coordinate of the "Shift" transformation and the angle set in
the "Rotation" transformation which the coordinate system rotates
around are displayed.
You cannot change these values.

Scale The active scale factor for the "Scaling" transformation is displayed for
the relevant axis here.
You cannot change these values.

Mirror The mirror axis which is defined via the "Mirroring" transformation is
displayed.
You cannot change these settings here.

Total offset

Total The total offset resulting from the basic offset and all active work
offsets and coordinate transformations is displayed.

Additional With the "Additional axes" soft key, you can display two additional
axes
rotary axes and determine their offset. These additional axes must be
activated via machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

! Press the softkey "Tools WOs" in the operating area "Work

offset".

The work offset list is opened.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-123
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.11 Work offsets

2.11.3 Select/deselect work offset in the Manual area

Operating sequence

Select with soft key

Jog

The following window is displayed.

Select a work offset

Position the cursor on parameter "Work offset" and use soft key
"Alternat." to set the work offset you require.

When you press the "Cycle Start" key, the work offset you have
Cycle Start selected will be activated.

The active work offset is also displayed in the "WCS" window.

e.g. WO1

The offset values programmed in the "Work offset" menu are also
taken into account in the tool coordinate system display WCS (work).

Deselect a work offset

Place the cursor on the "Work offset" parameter and set the field to "–"
using the "Alternat." soft key.

When you press the "Cycle Start" key, the active work offset will be
Cycle Start deactivated.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-124 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 2 2
11.02 Operation
2.12 Switching to CNC ISO operation

2.12 Switching to CNC ISO operation

You can switch from the ShopMill interface to the CNC ISO standard
operator interface of the SINUMERIK 840D or 840D/840Di/810D
system by pressing the "CNC ISO" soft key.

Soft key "CNC ISO" will work only if the machine manufacturer has
implemented the function internally via the PLC interface.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instruction manual!

If the "CNC ISO" soft key is active, the following basic display of the
CNC ISO operator interface appears on your screen:

ShopMill If you wish to return to the ShopMill operator interface, press soft key
"ShopMill"."

If you are working in the CNC ISO operator interface, please read the
User Documentation for the SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D system
(see Appendix, List of References).

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 2-125
 2 2
Operation 11.02
2.13 ShopMill Open (PCU 50)

2.13 ShopMill Open (PCU 50)

The ShopMill software is available for the PCU 50 in two versions,
ShopMill Classic and ShopMill Open. ShopMill Classic is the new
name for the conventional ShopMill software.

ShopMill Open differs from ShopMill Classic by its basic menu

bar/expanded basic menu bar.
ShopMill Open does not offer the option to switch to the CNC ISO user
interface. Instead, the HMI Advanced operating areas "Services",
"Diagnosis", "Start-up" and "Parameters" (without tool management
and work offsets), are located directly on the expanded horizontal soft
key bar.

Machine Program Program Messages Tools

Manager Alarms ZO

Services Diagnosis Start-Up Parameters

For a detailed description of the integrated HMI Advanced operating

areas, please refer to:
References: /BAD/, Operator's Guide HMI Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

In addition, the machine manufacturer can assign other operating

areas to some soft keys in the basic menu bar/expanded basic menu
bar.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

2.14 Remote diagnosis

Function

The control system can be operated from an external PC by means of

a remote diagnostic function. You can use a modem to link the control
system and the external PC.

Remote The remote diagnostic function is activated on the CNC ISO operator
diagnosis
interface in the Diagnosis operating area.

Remote Diagnosis is a software option.

For further information about remote diagnostics, please refer to:

References: /FB/, Description of Functions Extended Functions, F3

"

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

2-126 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill

Programming with ShopMill

3.1 Fundamental programming principles..................................................................... 3-129

3.2 Program structure ................................................................................................... 3-132

3.3 Create a ShopMill program ..................................................................................... 3-133

3.3.1 Create new program; define a blank ....................................................................... 3-133
3.3.2 Program new blocks................................................................................................ 3-136
3.3.3 Change program blocks .......................................................................................... 3-138
3.3.4 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 3-139

3.4 Program the tool, offset value and spindle speed ................................................... 3-142

3.5 Contour milling ........................................................................................................ 3-143

3.5.1 Free contour programming ..................................................................................... 3-144
3.5.2 Description of soft keys for free contour programming function ............................. 3-147
3.5.3 Description of parameters for line/circle contour elements ..................................... 3-149
3.5.4 Programming examples for freely defined contours ............................................... 3-150
3.5.5 Path milling of open and closed contours ............................................................... 3-153
3.5.6 Rough drilling in contour pockets ............................................................................ 3-156
3.5.7 Machine (rough cut) pocket with islands ................................................................. 3-159
3.5.8 Remove residual material ....................................................................................... 3-160
3.5.9 Finish pocket with islands ....................................................................................... 3-162

3.6 Straight line or circular path motions....................................................................... 3-164

3.6.1 Line.......................................................................................................................... 3-165
3.6.2 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 3-167
3.6.3 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 3-168
3.6.4 Helix ........................................................................................................................ 3-169
3.6.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 3-170
3.6.6 Polar line ................................................................................................................. 3-171
3.6.7 Polar circle .............................................................................................................. 3-172
3.6.8 Programming examples for polar coordinates ........................................................ 3-173

3.7 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 3-174

3.7.1 Centering................................................................................................................. 3-175
3.7.2 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 3-176
3.7.3 Deep-hole drilling .................................................................................................... 3-177
3.7.4 Boring ...................................................................................................................... 3-179
3.7.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 3-180
3.7.6 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 3-181
3.7.7 Drill and thread milling............................................................................................. 3-184
3.7.8 Position on freely programmable positions and position patterns........................... 3-186
3.7.9 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 3-187
3.7.10 Line position pattern ................................................................................................ 3-188
3.7.11 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 3-189
3.7.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 3-190
3.7.13 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 3-192
3.7.14 Obstacle .................................................................................................................. 3-193
3.7.15 Repeat positions ..................................................................................................... 3-194

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-127
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02

3.7.16 Programming examples for drilling.......................................................................... 3-195

3.8 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 3-197

3.8.1 Face milling ............................................................................................................. 3-197
3.8.2 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................. 3-200
3.8.3 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................ 3-204
3.8.4 Rectangular spigot................................................................................................... 3-207
3.8.5 Circular spigot.......................................................................................................... 3-209
3.8.6 Mill longitudinal slot ................................................................................................. 3-212
3.8.7 Circumferential slot.................................................................................................. 3-214
3.8.8 Use of position patterns for milling .......................................................................... 3-216

3.9 Measurements......................................................................................................... 3-219

3.9.1 Measure workpiece zero ......................................................................................... 3-219
3.9.2 Measure tool............................................................................................................ 3-221
3.9.3 Calibrate the measuring probe ................................................................................ 3-222

3.10 Miscellaneous functions .......................................................................................... 3-223

3.10.1 Call subroutine......................................................................................................... 3-223
3.10.2 Repeat program blocks ........................................................................................... 3-224
3.10.3 Change program settings ........................................................................................ 3-226
3.10.4 Call work offsets ...................................................................................................... 3-227
3.10.5 Define coordinate transformation ............................................................................ 3-228
3.10.6 Cylinder peripheral surface transformation ............................................................. 3-231
3.10.7 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 3-234
3.10.8 Miscellaneous functions .......................................................................................... 3-239

3.11 Insert G code in the ShopMill program .................................................................... 3-240

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-128 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.1 Fundamental programming principles

3.1 Fundamental programming principles

Important! Please pay particular attention to the following fundamental

principles when writing programs for your machine tool!

Axes The 3 main axes on milling machines are designated as X, Y and Z.

Axis Z is normally the tool axis.

Metric or inch The control system can process both metric and inch dimensions.
unit of measurement Depending on the basic setting you choose, the control interprets all
geometric values as either metric or inch dimensions.
Irrespective of the basic setting, you can set metric or inch dimensions
in the program header (define blank).
All dimensions stated in this section are metric.

Absolute dimensioning With the absolute dimensioning method, dimensions refer to the zero
point of the coordinate system of the total offset.

Incremental dimensioning With the incremental dimensioning method, the programmed

positional numerical value corresponds to the path to be traversed.
The direction of travel is determined by the sign.

Tool T A tool must be programmed for every cutting operation. With the
ShopMill machining cycles, a tool selection is already integrated in
every parameterization screenform. Exception: You must select a tool
before programming simple straight lines and circles.
Tool selection is modal with straight line/circle, i.e. if several machining
steps with the same tool occur in succession, you only need to
program the tool for the 1st straight line/circle.

Tool length compensation Tool length compensations take effect immediately the tool is loaded
into the spindle. Different tool offsets can be assigned to each tool with
multiple cutting edges.
The tool length compensation of the spindle tool remains active even
after the program has been executed (RESET).

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-129
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.1 Fundamental programming principles

Tool radius compensation The tool radius compensation is automatically included in the cycles
except for path milling. You can machine with or without radius
compensation in conjunction with the "Path milling" and "Line"
functions. In the case of the "Line" function, the tool radius
compensation has a modal action, i.e. it is not automatically
deactivated again.

Radius compensation left of contour

Radius compensation right of contour

Radius compensation off

Radius compensation is retained
as set

Spindle speed The spindle speed (S) determines the number of spindle rotations per
minute. The CW/CCW setting is made in the tool list in ShopMill.
Programming:
The spindle speed is input when a new tool is loaded into the spindle.
As an alternative to spindle speed, a cutting rate (V) can be specified
in m/min.
Spindle start/spindle stop:
The spindle is started directly after a new tool has been loaded. It is
stopped on Reset, end of program or tool change.

Cutting rate Peripheral speed at which the tool cutting edge machines the
workpiece. Cutting rates (V) are specified in m/min.

Cutting rate

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-130 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.1 Fundamental programming principles

Traverse at rapid traverse The programmed path is traversed along a straight line at the fastest
possible velocity without the workpiece being machined. Rapid
traverse is a non-modal command, i.e. if you want the axis to traverse
rapidly in the next block, then you must enter "Rapid traverse" as
feedrate (F) again.
If you do not program a feedrate or rapid traverse, the axis is
automatically traversed at the last programmed feed value (machining
feedrate).

Traverse at feedrate The tool travels at the programmed feedrate F along a straight line or
(machining feedrate) on a circle to the programmed end point and then machines the
workpiece. Machining feedrates (F) are specified in mm/min, mm/rev
or mm/tooth. With milling cycles, the feedrate is automatically
converted both at change from mm/min to mm/rev and when direction
is reversed.

With milling cycles, the feedrate for rough cutting is relative to the
milling tool center point. This also applies to finish cutting, with the
exception of concave curves where the feedrate is relative to the
cutting edge (contact point between milling tool and workpiece).

Feedrate in mm/tooth
Mills are multi-edged tools. For this reason, a value must be found
which guarantees that each cutting edge can machine the workpiece
under the best possible conditions. Feed per tooth corresponds to the
linear path traversed by the mill when a tooth is engaged. Feed per
tooth is also the effective distance covered by the table feed between
the engagement of two successive cutting edges.

Feedrate in mm/tooth

The machining feedrate is modal, i.e. even if the machining process

changes, you need not enter a new feedrate if the feedrate
programmed in the preceding block is still appropriate. This applies
even if you have programmed a rapid traverse command in between.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-131
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.2 Program structure

3.2 Program structure

The program is divided into 3 subsections:
Program header, program blocks and program end.
These subsections form a machining plan.

Program structure

Program header The program header contains the dimensions of the blank and
parameters which are effective throughout the program, e.g.
• dimension in mm or inches
• tool axis X, Y or Z
• return plane, safety clearance, machining direction

Program blocks To obtain a finished part, you must first program the various
machining operations, travel motions, machine commands, etc. The
program blocks represent this program.

Chained machining The control automatically chains the technology and position blocks.
These blocks are identified by a square bracket immediately beside
the machining symbol. The brackets are inserted from the beginning
to the end of the sequence of chained blocks.

Blocks N10 ... N25 are chained

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-132 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

3.3 Create a ShopMill program

3.3.1 Create new program; define a blank

New programs are set up in the "Program Manager" area.

Select with soft keys Programs New ShopMill

> Program

Enter a program name Enter a program name.

Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length. You
can use any letters, digits or the underscore symbol (_). ShopMill
automatically changes lower case to upper case.

Confirm the program name by pressing

soft key or with the "Input" key .

The screenform for setting the "Program header" parameters then

appears.

Parameterize the program

header

Set the program header parameters

Parameter settings in the program header are valid throughout the

entire program.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-133
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

Parameters for input of a • Workpiece corner point 1 (X0, Y0, Z0):

blank Workpiece corner point 1 is the reference point for the blank
dimensions. It must be entered as an absolute value.
• Workpiece corner point 2 or dimensions
(X1, Y1, Z1 or L, W, H):
Workpiece corner point 2 is opposite workpiece corner point 1. It
must be entered as an absolute value. The deviations are the
length, width and height of the blank.

Workpiece corner points 1 and 2 Workpiece corner point 1 and

deviations

• Define unit of measurement for program [mm or inch].

• Tool axis: The tool length is calculated in the set axis.
• Return plane (RP and safety clearance (SC):
Planes above workpiece. )
During machining the tool travels in rapid traverse from the tool
change point to the return plan and then to the safety clearance.
The machining feedrate is activated at this level. When the
machining operation is finished, the tool travels at machining
feedrate away from the workpiece onto the safety clearance
level. It travels from the safety clearance to the return plane and
then to the tool change point in rapid traverse.
The return plane is entered as an absolute value.
The safety clearance must be entered as an incremental value
(without sign).

Return plane (RP) and safety clearance (SC)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-134 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

Return plane (RP)

Safety
clearance (SC)
Z

X
Safety clearance for varying workpiece heights

• Machining direction:
When machining a pocket, a longitudinal groove or a spigot,
ShopMill applies the machining direction (climb or conventional)
and the spindle rotation entered in the tool list. The pocket is then
machined in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction.

Climb milling

Conventional milling

Machining pockets in climb or conventional milling operation with CW spindle

rotation

With path milling, the programmed contour direction determines

the direction of machining.

• Retraction with position patterns:

When working with optimized retraction, the tool travels in
relation to the contour across the workpiece at machining feedrate
and safety clearance (SC). On retraction to RP, the tool is retracted
to the return plane when the machining step is complete and
infeeds at the new position. Collisions with workpiece obstacles are
thus prevented when the tool is retracted and fed in, e.g. when
holes in pockets or grooves are machined at different levels and
positions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-135
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

Optimized retraction Retraction to return plane RP

Store parameters
Select with soft key
The parameters you have entered are stored. The machining plan is
then displayed.

End of program ShopMill has automatically defined the program end.

3.3.2 Program new blocks

Create program blocks Once you have defined the blank, you can define machining
operations, feedrates and positions in individual program blocks. You
will be supported by "Help" displays for individual machining
operations.

There is a limit on the memory space one program can occupy. You
can program up to 1,000 program blocks with the "Straight line"
function. If you are using other functions that require more memory
space, the maximum number of program blocks is reduced
accordingly.

Note New programming blocks are always inserted after the selected
block. You cannot program blocks before the program header or after
program end.

Parameter input fields

Feedrate:
If you do not program a value for feedrate (F) (empty field), the system
uses the last programmed feedrate.

Clear an input field:

Use the DEL key (or Backspace key) to clear an input field, i.e. to
delete the programmed value.

Preset (default) or empty parameter fields :

You must always enter a value in fields with a preset default. If you
clear a default field, soft key "Accept" disappears from the display!

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-136 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

"Alternat." soft key and toggle key:

If the cursor is positioned on an input field with various setting options,
soft key "Alternat." is automatically displayed on the vertical soft key
bar (see soft key "Alternat." in Section "Important soft keys for
operation and programming").

Roughing/finishing:
Every cycle can be programmed with roughing or finishing. If you wish
to rough cut the workpiece first and then finish cut it, you must call the
cycle a second time. The programmed values do not change if you call
the cycle again.
Some cycles offer roughing and finishing as a complete machining
operation, i.e. you need only call the cycle once.

Approach a cycle • Approach the programmed cycles with ShopMill

− Tool is above the return plane (RP) :
The tool is positioned in rapid traverse in the X/Y plane and then
in the Z direction to the return plane (RP)

Tool change point

Return
plane (RP)

Safety
Z clearance (SC)

X Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate

Approach a cycle above the return plane

− or tool is below the return plane (RP) :

The tool is positioned in rapid traverse first in the Z direction to
the return plane (RP) and then in rapid traverse in the X/Y plane

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-137
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

Return
plane (RP)
Tool change
point

Safety
Z clearance (SC)

X Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate

Approach a cycle below the return plane

• Tool axis travels in rapid traverse to safety clearance (SC)

• The cycle is then processed at the programmed machining
feedrate
• On completion of machining, the tool travels to the cycle center in
the X/Y plane at machining feedrate and then moves away from the
workpiece with the tool axis until it reaches safety clearance
• The tool axis then retracts to the return plane in rapid traverse
• The tool change point is approached from the return plane in rapid
traverse

3.3.3 Change program blocks

You can optimize the parameters in the programmed ShopMill blocks

later or adapt them to new situations, e.g. if you want to increase the
feedrate or change a position. You can change all parameters in all
program blocks directly in the relevant parameter screen.

! Press the "Program" soft key.

The directory overview is displayed.

! Position the cursor on the directory where you want to open a

program.

! Press the "Cursor right" or "Input" key.

-or- All programs in this directory are now displayed.

! Select the program you want to modify.

! Press the "Cursor right" or "Input" key.

-or- The machining plan is opened for the program.

! Position the cursor on the desired program block in the machining

plan.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-138 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

! Press the "Cursor right" key.

The parameter screen of the selected program block is displayed.

! Make your required changes.

! Press the "Accept" soft key or the "Cursor left" key.

-or- The changes are validated in the program.

3.3.4 Program editor

Use the program editor if you want to modify the sequence of the
program blocks within a program, delete program blocks or copy
program blocks from one program to another.

The program editor provides the following functions:

• Select
You can select several program blocks at once, e.g. to cut or copy
them.
• Copy/Insert
You can copy and insert program blocks both within the same
program and between different programs.
• Cut
You can cut program blocks and delete them this way. The
program blocks remain in the clipboard so that you can insert them
at another location.
• Search
You can search for block numbers or any string of characters
within a program.
• Rename
You can rename a contour in the program editor, e.g. if you have
copied the contour from another location.
• Numbering
If you insert a new or copied program block between two existing
program blocks, ShopMill automatically generates a new block
number. This number might be higher than the block number in the
next block. You can use the "Numbering" function to number the
program blocks in ascending order.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-139
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

Open the program editor ! Select a program.

! Press the "Expansion" soft key.

The soft keys of the program editor are displayed in the vertical soft
key bar.

Select a program block ! Position the cursor in the machining plan on the first or last block
you want to select.

Mark
! Press the "Mark" soft key.

! Use the cursor keys to highlight all additional program blocks you
want to select.

The program blocks are now selected.

Copy a program block ! Select the desired program block(s) in the machining plan.

Copy
! Press the "Copy" soft key.

The program blocks are copied to the clipboard.

Cut a program block ! Select the desired program block(s) in the machining plan.

Cut
! Press the "Cut" soft key.

The program blocks are removed from the machining plan and stored
in the clipboard.

Insert a program block ! Copy or cut the desired program block(s) in the machining plan.

! Position the cursor on the program block behind which you want to
insert the program block(s).

Insert
! Press the "Insert" soft key.

The program blocks are inserted in the program's machining plan.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-140 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.3 Create a ShopMill program

Search

Search ! Select soft key "Search".

>
! Specify a block number or text.

! Select whether to start the search at the beginning of the program

or from the current cursor position.

Search ! Select soft key "Search".

>
ShopMill searches the program. The cursor will be positioned on the
search result.

Continue ! Press the "Continue search" soft key if you want to continue the
search
search.

Rename contour ! Position the cursor on a contour in the machining plan.

Rename ! Press the "Rename" soft key.

! Specify a new name for the contour.

! Press soft key "OK".

The name of the contour is modified and displayed in the machining

plan.

Number program blocks

Renumber
! Press the "Renumber" soft key.

The program blocks are numbered in ascending sequence.

Exit the program editor

! Exit the program editor by pressing the "Back" soft key.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-141
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.4 Program the tool, offset value and spindle speed

3.4 Program the tool, offset value and spindle speed

General When you program cycles, you will find the tool displayed in the
screenform. When you program a line or a circular arc, you will have
to select a tool beforehand.

Tool
Select with soft keys:

Programming Select parameter field "T". ShopMill allows you to enter tools in several
a tool (T) different ways:

1st way: Enter the name or number of a tool via the keyboard.
2nd way: Press area key "Tool, offset", select a tool with
to
the cursor keys and select soft key program .
The tool is transferred to the parameter field.

Cutting edge (D) You can select/specify for each programmed tool whether you want to
apply cutting edge offset values D. The offsets are stored in the tool
list.
You must program the correct tool edge number D for the different
tools (counterbore with spigot, stepped drill, etc.) to avoid risk of
collisions (see also Sections "Programming examples for drilling" and
"Tools and tool offsets").

Spindle speed (S) or In ShopMill you can program either the spindle speed (S) or the cutting
cutting rate (V) rate (V). You can toggle between them using the "Alternat." key. In the
milling cycles, the spindle speed is automatically converted to the
cutting rate and vice versa.
• Spindle speed and cutting rate remain valid until you program a
new tool.
• Spindle speeds are programmed in rev/min.
• Cutting rates are programmed in m/min
• You can set the direction of rotation of a tool in the tool list.

Allowance (DR) You can program an allowance on the tool radius in this parameter
input field. A finishing allowance is then left when the contour is
machined (see also Section "Tools and tool offsets").

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-142 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

Example You want to leave a finishing allowance of 0.5mm on a contour.

DR must then be programmed with 0.5mm.
With a setting of DR=0, the programmed contour is cut without a
finishing allowance.

3.5 Contour milling

Function

You can program the following machining operations using the contour
milling cycles.

Free contour programming When programming a freely defined contour, you can input a contour
and assign it a contour name. The geometry processor integrated in
ShopMill offers the following functions:
• Input of contours with at least two and a maximum of 250 elements
• Programming of additional transition elements (chamfer, radius,
tangential transition)
• Input of incompletely dimensioned elements
New
Select with soft key contour >

After programming the contour, you can machine the contour with path
milling or remove stock from contour pockets with/without islands. This
sequence must be adhered to, i.e. first program the geometry for the
contour, then specify the technology.

Path milling Path milling is a machining cycle with which you can machine open
and closed contours. The most important functions are:
• Approach and retract strategies
• Finishing allowances for XY plane and Z direction (tool axis)
• Cut segmentation in Z direction (tool axis)
Path
Select with soft key milling >

Rough-drilling The rough-drilling function can be used on contour pockets before

they are removed. The machining cycle comprises a centering cycle
and the actual rough-drilling cycle.
Rough
Select with soft key drilling >

Remove pocket with islandsThis is a cycle that can machine pockets with or without islands. The
pocket and island contours are programmed as a freely defined
contour. The cycle offers the following functions:
• Definition of insertion strategy

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-143
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

• Finishing allowances for XY plane and Z direction (tool axis)

• Cut segmentation in Z direction (tool axis)
Remove
Select with soft key >

Remove residual material This cycle allows residual material to be removed with a small cutter. It
can be useful in cases where the use of a tool with a large diameter
has left residual material along the contour, for example, in corners.
Residual
Select with soft key: material >

Finish a pocket This cycle can be used to finish cut the base of a pocket or the pocket
with island and island contours.
Remove
Select with soft key: >

3.5.1 Free contour programming

Function

You can create simple or complex contours and then machine them
with "Path milling" or "Solid machining" cycles.
An integrated geometry processor calculates any parameters that are
missing provided that it can derive them from other parameters.

The programmed contours are stored at the end of the current

program.

Program a new contour and New

Select with soft keys contour >
define the starting point

Enter a contour name. This must be a unique name.

If you want to create a contour that is to be similar to an already

existing one, you can also copy the old contour, rename it and modify
selected contour elements only.
On the other hand, if you want to use an identical contour at another
program location, you must not rename the contour. Any changes
made to the first contour are automatically made for the contour with
the same name.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-144 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

When entering a contour, start at a position you know and enter this
as the starting point. Then define the tool axis. If you alter the tool axis,
ShopMill will automatically alter the associated starting point axes.

The starting point is stored with soft key .

Transfer the contour to the Transfer the programmed contour to the machining plan by pressing
machining plan soft key "Accept". You can then machine the contour using the
machining cycles.

Free contour programming Beginning at the starting point, enter the first contour element, e.g.
straight line. Enter all data specified in the workshop drawing: Length
of line, end position, transition to next element, angle of lead, etc.
By pressing soft key "All param.", you can display additional parameter
input fields for the contour element.

If you do not enter values in some parameter input fields, ShopMill

assumes that you do not know what the settings should be and tries to
calculate the settings from other parameters.

Additional commands You can enter any additional commands in the form of G code for
each contour element. Additional commands (max. 40 characters) are
entered in the Start form and under soft key "All param." for individual
contour elements.
For example, you can program deceleration and exact stop for circular
contour element "G9".

When a contour is "path milled", it is always machined in the

programmed direction. By programming the contour in a clockwise or
counter-clockwise direction, you can determine whether the contour is
machined in a synchronized operation or reverse rotation operation
(see following table).

Outside contour
Desired machining CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
direction
Synchronized operation Programmed in clockwise direction Programmed in counter-clockwise
Cutter radius compensation CCW direction, cutter radius comp. CW
Reverse rotation Programmed in counter-clockwise Programmed in clockwise direction
direction, cutter radius comp. CW Cutter radius compensation CCW

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-145
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

Inside contour:
Desired machining CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
direction
Synchronized operation Programmed in counter-clockwise Programming in clockwise direction
direction, cutter radius comp. CCW Cutter radius compensation CW
Reverse rotation Programming in clockwise direction Programmed in counter-clockwise
Cutter radius compensation CW direction, cutter radius comp. CCW

Contours as pockets Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the starting and
or islands end points of the contour are identical.

Transition element You can use a transition element whenever there is an intersection
Chamfer/radius between two successive elements which can be calculated from input
values. Otherwise you must use a line or circle contour element.

Transition element in In a closed contour, you can program a transition element from the
closed contours last to the first element in the contour. The contour starting point lies
outside the contour after you have programmed the transition.

Parameters with gray These parameters have been calculated by ShopMill and cannot be
background altered by the user.
When you alter the programmable parameter input fields (white
background), the control calculates new data which are then
immediately displayed again in the input form.

Input value is already If you over-define a contour, ShopMill may automatically calculate a
calculated value that you would normally be required to input yourself.
This may cause problems if the input value calculated by the control
does not tally with the workshop drawing. If this is the case, you must
delete the values from which the control is deriving the incorrect input
value. You can then enter the exact setting from the workshop
drawing.

Programming graphic The contour you have programmed is displayed in the programming
graphic. Contour elements can be displayed in different line styles and
colors:
• Black: Programmed contour
• Red: Current contour element
• Green, dotted: Alternative element
• Blue: Partially defined element

The programming graphic displays as much of the contour as the

control can interpret on the basis of parameter inputs. If your contour
is not displayed in the programming graphic, then you need to enter
more data. Check the contour elements you have already
programmed if necessary. You may have omitted to enter settings
which you know.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-146 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

3.5.2 Description of soft keys for free contour programming function

Vertical line

Horizontal line

Diagonal line

Circle / Arc
Cylinder peripheral surface When the "Cylinder peripheral surface transformation" function is
transformation active, the lengths (in circumferential direction of cylinder peripheral
surface) of contours can be defined on a cylinder in the form of
angular measurements. Depending on the selected axis (selection via
display machine data), the start screen and contour element screens
display the input in degrees for Xα, Iα or for Yα, Jα (see also section
"Cylinder surface transformation").
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Tangent to preceding The contour element has a tangential transition to the preceding
element element, thereby setting the angle to the preceding element (α2) to
0 degrees. The status "tangential" appears in the input field of
parameter α 2.
Tangent to
Select with soft key: prec. elem.

Additional parameter If your drawing contains other data (dimensions) for an element, you
displays can display further input options by pressing soft key "All param.".
All
Select with soft key: param.

Descriptions of individual parameters can be found in Section

"Description of contour element parameters".

Select a dialog If your contour involves parameter constellations which permit more
than one contour characteristic, the system will request you to select a
dialog. Make the correct selection (continuous black line) using soft
key "Alternat." and confirm with soft key "Accept".
Dialog Accept
Select with soft keys: selection dialog

Alter the selected If you wish to alter your selected dialog, you must select the contour
dialog element for which the dialog selection was made.
When you press soft key "Change selection", both dialog alternatives
are displayed again. Make the selection again.
Change Dialog Accept
Select with soft keys: selection selection dialog

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-147
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

If the selection has been made implicitly from other input values, the
system will not request you to make a selection.

Clear a parameter input You can clear the programmed value again with the DEL key.
field

Store a contour element If you have set all necessary parameters for a contour element or
selected the required contour with soft key "Dialog select", store the
contour element by pressing soft key "Accept".

Select with soft key:

You can now program the next contour element.

Change a contour element Select the programmed contour element that you wish to alter with the
cursor keys. Press the "Input" key to display a parameter screenform
showing the magnified contour element. You can now change the
element parameters and then save them.
If two contours with the same name are defined in your program,
changes made to one contour are automatically made to the other
contour with the same name.

Delete contour element Select the contour element you wish to delete with the cursor keys.
The selected contour symbol and appropriate contour element in the
programming graphic are highlighted in red. Then press soft keys
"Delete element" and "OK".
Delete
Select with soft keys: element

Close the contour When you press soft key "Close contour", ShopMill inserts a straight
line between your current position and the starting point, thus closing
the contour.
Close
Select with soft key: contour
Close and store Once you have closed the contour, press soft key "Accept" to exit from
a contour free contour programming mode. The programmed contour is
transferred to the machining plan at the same time.

Select with soft key:

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-148 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

3.5.3 Description of parameters for line/circle contour elements

Parameters Description of "Straight line" contour element Unit

X absolute Absolute end position in X direction mm

X incremental Incremental end position in X direction mm
Y absolute Absolute end position in Y direction
Y incremental Incremental end position in Y direction
L Length of line mm
α1 Lead angle in relation to X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element, tangential transition: α2=0 Degrees
Transition to Transition element to next contour is a chamfer (FS) mm
following Transition element to next contour is a radius (R) mm
element FS=0 or R=0 means no transition element.
Additional Any additional command in G code form
command

Parameters Description of "Circle" contour element Unit

X absolute Absolute end position in X direction mm

X incremental Incremental end position in X direction mm
Y absolute Absolute end position in Y direction
Y incremental Incremental end position in Y direction
α1 Start angle in relation to X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element, tangential transition: α2=0 Degrees
β1 End angle in relation to X axis Degrees
β2 Arc angle of circle Degrees
Direction of in clockwise or counter-clockwise direction
rotation
R Radius of circle mm
I Position of arc center point in X direction (abs. or incr.) mm
J Position of arc center point in Y direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Transition to Transition element to next contour is a chamfer (FS) mm
following Transition element to next contour is a radius (R) mm
element FS=0 or R=0 means no transition element.
Additional Any additional command in G code form
command

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-149
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

3.5.4 Programming examples for freely defined contours

Example 1 Starting point: X=0 abs., Y=5.7 abs.

The contour is programmed in a CW direction using dialog selection.

R9
60 °

.5
Starting point

15.2
X=0, Y=5.7
R2

R2

4.65
4.65
.2
R3
R2

14.8
Y

22 °

5 11.5

Workshop drawing of contour

Element Input Comment

CCW rotation, R=9.5, I=0 abs., make dialog selection,
transition to following element: R=2
α1=−30 degrees Note the angle in the Help
display!
CW rotation, tangent prev. elem.,
R=2, J=4.65 abs.
CCW rotation, tangent prev. elem.
R=3.2, I=11.5 abs., J=0 abs., make dialog selection, make
dialog selection
CW rotation, tangent prev. elem.
R=2, J=−4.65 abs., make dialog selection
Tangent to prev. elem. Note the angle in the Help
Y=−14.8 abs., α1=−158 degrees display!
All parameters, L=5, make dialog selection

Y=5.7 abs.

X=0 abs.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-150 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

Example 2 Starting point: X=0 abs., Y=0 abs.

The contour is programmed in a CW direction using dialog selection. It is
advisable to display all parameters for this contour by selecting the "All
param." soft key.

Starting point
X=0, Y=0

R25

R5
Y R7.5

30 °

X
Workshop drawing of contour

Element Input Comment

Y=−104 abs.

CW rotation, R=79, I=0 abs., make dialog selection,

all parameters, β2=30 degrees
CW rotation, tangent prev. elem.
R=7.5, all parameters, β2=180 degrees
CCW rotation, R=64, X=−6 abs., I=0 abs.,
make dialog selection, make dialog selection
Transition to following element: R=5
All parameters, α1=90 degrees, Note the angle in the Help
Transition to following element: R=5 display!
CW rotation, R=25, X=0 abs., Y=0 abs. I=0 abs., make dialog
selection, make dialog selection

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-151
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

Example 3 Starting point: X=5.67 abs., Y=0 abs.

The contour is programmed in a counter-clockwise direction.

X= - 137.257 abs.
43.972
Starting point
X=5.67 Y=0

125 °

Y R72

Workshop drawing of contour

Element Input Comment

All parameters, α1=180 degrees Note the angle in the Help display!

X=−43.972 inc, all parameters Coordinate X in "abs" and in "inc"

X=−137.257 abs, α1=−125 degrees Note the angle in the Help display!
X=43.972 inc Coordinate X in "abs" and in "inc"
α1=−55 degrees Note the angle in the Help display!
X=5.67 abs

CW rotation, R=72, X=5.67 abs., Y=0 abs., make dialog

selection

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-152 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

3.5.5 Path milling of open and closed contours

Function

You can mill along any contour you have programmed with the "Path
milling" function. The function operates with cutter radius
compensation.
The contour does not have to be closed. You can perform any of the
following operations:
• Inside or outside machining (on left or right of the contour).
• Machining along center-point path

Select with soft key Path

milling >

Path milling on right or left A programmed contour can be machined with the cutter radius on the
of the contour right or left. You can also select various modes and strategies of
approach and retraction from the contour.

Approach/retraction mode The tool can approach or retract from the contour along a quadrant,
semi-circle or straight line.
• With a quadrant or semi-circle approach path, you must enter the
current center point path.
• With a straight line, you must specify the distance between the
cutter outer edge and the contour start or end point.
You can also program a mixture of modes, e.g. approach along
quadrant, retract along semi-circle.

L1/L2

R1/R2 R1/R2

Approach and retraction along straight line, quadrant and semi-circle; (L1=approach
length, L2=retract length, R1=approach radius, R2=retract radius)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-153
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

Approach/retraction strategy You can choose between planar approach/retraction and spatial
approach/retraction:

• Planar approach: The tool first approaches in the Z direction

(machining depth) and then in the XY plane.
• Spatial approach: The tool approaches in depth
and plane simultaneously.

• Retraction takes place in the opposite order.

You can program a mixture of strategies, e.g. planar approach,
spatial retraction.

Path milling along the A programmed contour can also be machined along the center-point
center-point path path if the operation has been activated under radius compensation

(no radius compensation). In this instance, the tool can approach

and retract only along a straight line since the control cannot
determine which side the contour must be approached from.

L1/L2

Approach and retraction in a straight line on center-point path (L1=approach length,

L2=retraction length)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-154 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Radius Machining on left of contour

compensation
Machining on right of contour

Machining along center-point path

Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Z0 Reference plane (abs. or incr.)
Z1 Final depth (abs. or incr.) mm
DZ Infeed depth mm
UZ Finishing allowance on base mm
UXY Finishing allowance on edge (not applicable to center-point path machining mm
operations)
Approach along a quadrant (segment of a spiral) *)
mode along a semicircle (segment of a spiral) *)
along a straight line (oblique line in space)

Approach planar
strategy
spatial
R1 or L1 Approach radius *), approach length
Retraction along a quadrant (segment of a spiral) *)
mode along a semicircle (segment of a spiral) *)
along a straight line (oblique line in space)

Retraction planar
strategy
spatial
R2 or L2 Retraction radius *), retraction length
Select lift-off If several depth infeeds are necessary, specify the retraction height, i.e. the height
mode the tool is to retract to between the individual infeeds (at transition from end of
contour to start).
Z0 + safety clearance
By safety clearance
To return plane
No retraction

*) applies only to path milling on left and right of contour

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-155
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

3.5.6 Rough drilling in contour pockets

Function

If a milling tool cannot be inserted in the center to remove stock from

contour pockets, it is necessary to rough-drill first.
The number and positions of the required rough drill holes depends on
certain conditions, e.g. type of contour, tool, plane infeed, finishing
allowances.

The rough-drilling cycle comprises a centering cycle and the actual

rough-drilling cycle.
The drilling positions in the contour pocket cycle are determined when
the contour pocket is calculated. This calculation generates a special
drilling program that is called in the rough drilling cycles (centering and
rough drilling).

Contour pocket
Contour island
Rough drilling/centering contour pocket
Rough drilling/rough drilling contour pocket
Solid machining, roughing
Residual material
Solid machining, finishing plane
Solid machining, finishing depth

Example of a chain containing rough drilling (centering and rough drilling) and solid
machining

If you are milling more than one pocket and want to avoid unnecessary
tool changes, it is advisable to rough-drill all pockets first and then
remove stock. In this case, for centering/rough-drilling you have to set
all additional parameters that appear when you press the "All
parameters" soft key. Then proceed as follows for programming:

1. Contour pocket 1
2. Centering
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Centering
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Rough drilling
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Rough drilling
9. Contour pocket 1
10. Solid machining
11. Contour pocket 2
12. Solid machining

If you are doing all the machining for the pocket at once, i.e. centering,
rough-drilling and removing stock directly in sequence, and do not set

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-156 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

the additional parameters for centering/rough-drilling, ShopMill will

take these parameter values from the stock removal (roughing)
machining step.

Centering

Select with soft keys Rough- Centering

drilling >

Select key
to call Help display

Centering in contour pocket

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

TR Reference tool for centering
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed plane mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as the ratio --> plane infeed
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm). %
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
Select lift-off Liftoff mode before new infeed
mode If a machining operation requires several insertion points, you can program the
retraction height: mm
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance
On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 in the pocket area, "Z0 + safety clearance" can
be selected as the lift-off mode.

Rough drilling

Select with soft keys Rough- Rough

drilling > drilling

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-157
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

Select key
to call Help display

Rough drilling a contour pocket

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

TR Reference tool for rough-drilling
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed plane mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as the ratio --> plane infeed
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm). %
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
Select lift-off Liftoff mode before new infeed
mode If a machining operation requires several insertion points, you can program the
retraction height: mm
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance
On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 in the pocket area, "Z0 + safety clearance" can
be selected as the lift-off mode.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-158 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

3.5.7 Machine (rough cut) pocket with islands

Function

Before you can machine a pocket with islands, you must enter the
contour of the pocket and islands (see Section "Free contour
programming"). The first contour you specify is interpreted as the
pocket contour and all the others as islands.

Using the programmed contours and the input screen form for solid
machining, ShopMill generates a program which removes the pockets
with islands from inside to outside in parallel to the contour. The
direction is determined by the direction of rotation specified in the
program header for machining (reverse or synchronous).

The islands may lie partially outside the pocket or overlap one another.

Select with soft key Remove

>

Select key
to call Help display

Help displays for solid machining

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Machining type Roughing mm
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed in X/Y plane. mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio ! plane infeed
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm). %
DZ Max. infeed depth (abs. or incr.) mm
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
ZU Finishing allowance, depth mm
Starting point The starting point can be calculated automatically or entered manually.
X Starting point X (abs.), manual input only mm
Y Starting point Y (abs.), manual input only mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-159
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

Insertion Oscillation: The tool is inserted in oscillating mode at the programmed angle (EW).
Helical: The tool is inserted along a helical path with the
programmed radius (ER) and programmed pitch (EP).
Center: This insertion strategy requires a cutter which cuts across
center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ).
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees
FZ Feedrate FZ (for Center only) mm/min
EP Insertion pitch (for Helical only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for Helical only) mm
Select lift-off If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height
mode must be programmed:
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance (SC) mm

On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height.
If the pocket area does not contain any elements larger than Z0, then
Z0 + safety clearance (SC) can be programmed as the lift-off mode.

When input manually, the starting point can also be located outside
the pocket. This can be useful, for example, when machining a pocket
which is open on one side. The machining operation then begins
without insertion with a linear movement into the open side of the
pocket.

3.5.8 Remove residual material

Function

If you have removed stock in a pocket (with/without islands) and

residual material still remains, ShopMill will detect this automatically.
You can remove this residual material with a suitable tool without
having to machine the entire pocket again, i.e. no unnecessary
operations.
Material that remains as a final machining allowance is not residual
material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling tool used
for stock removal.

If you are milling more than one pocket and want to avoid unnecessary
tool changes, it is advisable to remove stock from all pockets first and
then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing residual
material, you also have to set the Reference tool TR parameter which
appears when you press the "All parameters" soft key. Then proceed
as follows for programming:

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-160 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

1. Contour pocket 1
2. Solid machining
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Solid machining
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Remove residual material
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Remove residual material

The "Residual material" function is a software option.

Select with soft key Residual

material >

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for residual material

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Machining type Roughing
TR Reference tool for residual material
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed, plane mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio --> plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. infeed, depth mm
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
Select lift-off If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height
mode can be programmed:
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance (SC) mm
On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height.
If the pocket area does not contain any elements larger than Z0, then
Z0 + safety clearance (SC) can be programmed as the lift-off mode.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-161
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.5 Contour milling

3.5.9 Finish pocket with islands

Function

If for removing stock from the pocket, you have programmed a final
machining allowance for the pocket base/edge, you also finish cut the
pocket.
For finish cutting the base and edge, you must program a separate
block for each operation. The pocket is only machined once though.
When finish cutting, ShopMill takes any existing island(s) into account
as is the case for rough cutting.

Select with soft key Remove

>

Select the "Finish cutting base" or "Finish cutting edge" machining

type.

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Finish pocket with islands"

Parameters Description of finish cut along base: Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Machining type Finishing on base
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed, plane mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio --> plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
Starting point The starting point can be determined automatically or entered manually.
When entered manually, the starting point can be positioned outside the pocket. In
this case, the tool first machines along a straight line into the pocket, e.g. for a
pocket open on the side without insertion.
X Coordinate of starting point (abs.), manual input only mm
Y Coordinate of starting point (abs.), manual input only mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-162 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.5 Contour milling

Insertion Oscillation: The tool is inserted at the programmed angle (EW).

Helical: The tool is inserted along a helical path with the
programmed radius (ER) and programmed pitch (EP).
Center: This insertion strategy requires a cutter which cuts across
center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ).
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees
EP Insertion pitch (for Helical only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for Helical only) mm
FZ Feedrate FZ (for Center only) mm/min
Select lift-off If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height
mode can be programmed:
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance (SC) mm
On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height.
If the pocket area does not contain any elements larger than Z0, then
Z0 + safety clearance (SC) can be programmed as the lift-off mode.

Parameters Description of finish cut along edge: Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Machining type Finishing on edge
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DZ Max. infeed, depth mm
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
Select lift-off If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height
mode can be programmed:
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance (SC) mm

On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height.
If the pocket area does not contain any elements larger than Z0, then
Z0 + safety clearance (SC) can be programmed as the lift-off mode.
Note: An alternative to the "Edge finish cut" option is the "Path milling" function
which offers greater optimization potential (approach and retract strategies and
modes).

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-163
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

This function is intended for the implementation of very simple
machining operations as path movements.
More complex operations such as contours with chamfers, radii,
approach strategies, tangential transitions, etc. should be
implemented using the "Mill contour" and "Path milling" functions.

You must program a tool before you program simple lines or circles. A
tool with spindle speed is selected by means of soft keys "Straight
circle" and "Tool".
You can only program rapid traverse for linear travel motions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-164 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6.1 Line

Function

The tool moves at the programmed feedrate or in rapid traverse from

its current position to the programmed end position.

Radius compensation If you choose, you can execute the straight line with radius
compensation. Radius compensation has a modal action, i.e. you
have to deselect radius compensation again if you want to traverse
without it. And, with several consecutive straight lines with radius
compensation, you can only select radius compensation in the first
program block.

When executing the first path motion with radius compensation, the
tool traverses without compensation at the starting point and with
compensation at the end point, i.e. when a vertical path is
programmed, the tool traverses and oblique path. The compensation
is not applied over the entire traversing path until the second
programmed path motion with radius compensation is executed. The
effect is reversed when you deselect radius compensation.

programmed
programmed path
path

travel path travel path

First path motion with First path motion with deselected radius
radius compensation compensation

To avoid deviation between the programmed and actually traversed

path, you can program the first path motion with radius compensation
or deselected radius compensation outside the workpiece. You cannot
program a motion without specifying coordinates.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-165
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

Select with soft keys Straight

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for a line

Parameters Description Unit

X Coordinate of end point in X direction (abs. or incr.) mm

Y Coordinate of end point in Y direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Z Coordinate of end point in Z direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the cutter travels in the programmed
compensation direction:
Radius compensation, left Radius compensation off
of contour
Radius compensation, right Radius compensation is retained
of contour as set

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-166 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6.2 Circle with known center point

Function

The tool travels along a circular path from its current position to the
programmed circle end point. You must know the position of the circle
center point. The control calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the
basis of your interpolation parameter settings.
The circle can only be traversed at machining feedrate. You must
program a tool before the circle can be traversed.

Select with soft keys Circle

Center point

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for circle with known center point

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of The tool travels in the programmed direction from the circle start point to its end
rotation point. You can program this direction as clockwise or counter-clockwise.
X X position circle end point (abs. or incr.) mm
Y Y position circle end point (abs. or incr.) mm
I Distance between circle start and center point in X direction (incr.) mm
J Distance between circle start and center point in Y direction (incr.) mm
Plane The circle is traversed in the set plane with the relevant interpolation parameters:
XYIJ: XY plane with interpolation parameters I and J mm
XZIK: XZ plane with interpolation parameters I and K mm
YZJK: YZ plane with interpolation parameters J and K mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-167
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6.3 Circle with known radius

Function

The tool traverses a circular path with the programmed radius from its
current position to the programmed circle end point. The control
system works out the circle center point. You do not need to program
interpolation parameters.
The circle can only be traversed at machining feedrate.

Select with soft keys Circle

Radius

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for circle with known radius

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of The tool travels in the programmed direction from the circle start point to its end
rotation point. You can program this direction as clockwise or counter-clockwise.
X X position circle end point (abs. or incr.) mm
Y Y position circle end point (abs. or incr.) mm
R Radius of arc; mm
You can select the arc of your choice by entering a positive or a negative sign.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-168 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6.4 Helix

Function

With helical interpolation, a circular movement is overlaid in the plane

with a linear motion in the tool axis, i.e. a spiral is created.

Select with soft keys Helix

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for a helix

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of The tool travels in the programmed direction from the circle start point to its end
rotation point. You can program this direction as clockwise or counter-clockwise.
I, J Incremental: Distance between helix start and center point mm
in X and Y directions
Absolute: Center point of helix in X and Y directions
P Pitch of helix; The pitch is programmed in mm per revolution. mm/360 °
Z Z position of helix end point (abs. or incr.) mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-169
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6.5 Polar coordinates

Function

If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with

radius and angles, you will find it helpful to program these as polar
coordinates.
You can program straight lines and circles as polar coordinates.

Define a pole You must define the pole before you can program a line or circle in
polar coordinates. This pole acts as the reference point of the polar
coordinate system.
The angle for the first line or circle then needs to be programmed in
absolute coordinates. You can program the angles for any further lines
and circles as either absolute or incremental coordinates.

Select with soft keys Polar Pole

Parameters Description Unit

X X position of pole (abs. or incr.) mm

Y Y position of pole (abs. or incr.) mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-170 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6.6 Polar line

Function

A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by a radius (L)

and an angle (α). The angle refers to the X axis.
The tool moves from its current position on a straight line to the
programmed end point at the machining feedrate or in rapid traverse.

The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be
programmed with an absolute angle. You can program any further
lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Select with soft keys Polar

Straight
Polar

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for polar line with absolute and incremental angle

Parameters Description Unit

L Radius from pole to end point of line mm

α Polar angle (abs. or incr., positive or negative) Degrees
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the cutter travels in the programmed
compensation direction:
Radius compensation, left Radius compensation off
of contour
Radius compensation, right Radius compensation is retained
of contour as set

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-171
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6.7 Polar circle

Function

A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by an angle (α). The

angle refers to the X axis.
The tool moves from its current position on a circular path to the
programmed end point (angle) at the machining feedrate.
The radius corresponds to the distance from the current tool position
to the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point positions are at
the same distance from the defined pole.

The 1st circle in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be
programmed with an absolute angle. You can program any further
lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Select with soft keys Polar

Straight
Polar

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for polar circle with absolute and incremental angle

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of The tool travels in the programmed direction from the circle start point to its end
rotation point. You can program this direction as clockwise (right) or counter-clockwise (left).
α Polar angle (abs. or incr., positive or negative) Degrees

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-172 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.6 Straight line or circular path motions

3.6.8 Programming examples for polar coordinates

Program a pentagon You want to machine the outside contour of a pentagon.

Make sure that you enter the correct workpiece dimensions!
Approach start point in rapid traverse: X70, Y50, radius compensation off.
Pole: X=50, Y=50
1. 1st polar line: L=20, α= −72 absolute, radius compensation right
2. 2nd to 5th polar line: L=20, α= −72 degrees incremental,
Radius compensation right

Programming graphic and extract from machining plan

Program an arc of 225 You want to machine the outside contour of an arc.
degrees Make sure that you enter the correct workpiece dimensions!
Approach start point in rapid traverse: X=80, Y=50, radius compensation right
Pole: X=60, Y=50
CW rotation, α= 135 degrees absolute

Programming graphic and extract from machining plan

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-173
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7 Drilling

Program holes and threads In ShopMill, first program the technology blocks in the exact order in
which they need to be performed, e.g.
1. Centering, with tool and input of spindle speed and machining
feedrate
2. Deep-hole drilling, with tool and input of spindle speed and
machining feedrate
3. Tapping with tool and input of spindle speed and machining
feedrate

Once you have programmed the technologies, you need to enter the
position data. ShopMill provides various positioning patterns (see
Section "Positions").

This sequence, first technology block and then positioning block must
be adhered to in drilling cycles.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-174 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

3.7.1 Centering

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the position to be centered,

allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. The tool is inserted
into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F) until it reaches Z1 or
until the surface diameter is the correct size. When the dwell time
expires, the tool is retracted in rapid traverse to either the return plane
or the safety clearance depending on the setting in parameter
"Retraction position pattern". You will find parameter "Retraction
position pattern" in the program header or under "Settings" in the
"Miscellaneous" menu.

Select with soft keys Centering

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for centering at depth Help display for centering on diameter

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Diameter The tool is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter on the surface is the correct
size. The angle for the center drill entered in the tool list is applied in this case.
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the programmed insertion depth is
Tip reached.
∅ It is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter is correct. mm
Z1 It is inserted into the workpiece until it reaches Z1. mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" soft key). mm
DT Dwell time for relief cut s
U

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-175
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7.2 Drilling and reaming

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the programmed position,

allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. It is then inserted
into the workpiece at the feedrate programmed under F until it reaches
depth Z1.

Drilling: If Z1 has been reached and the dwell time expired, the drill is
retracted at rapid traverse either to the return plane or the safety
clearance depending on the setting in parameter "Retraction position
pattern". You will find parameter "Retraction position pattern" in the
program header or under "Settings" in the "Miscellaneous" menu.

Reaming: If Z1 has been reached and the dwell time expired, the
reamer is retracted at the programmed retraction feedrate to the
safety clearance.

Select with soft keys Drilling

Reaming

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for drilling Help display for reaming

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Shank The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value
programmed for Z1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied.
Tip The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value
programmed for Z1 (does not apply in reaming).
Z1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank. mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" soft key). mm
DT Dwell time for relief cut s
U
FB Retraction feedrate (for reaming only)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-176 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

3.7.3 Deep-hole drilling

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the programmed position,

allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. It is then inserted
into the workpiece at the programmed feedrate.

Select with soft keys Deep hole

drilling

Stock removal The tool drills at the programmed feedrate (F) until the 1st infeed
depth is reached. On reaching the 1st depth, the tool is retracted from
the workpiece at rapid traverse for stock removal and is then re-
inserted at the 1st infeed depth reduced by a clearance distance (V3).
The tool then drills to the next infeed depth and is then retracted again,
repeating this process until the final drill depth (Z1) is reached. On
expiry of the dwell time (DT), the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to
the safety clearance.

Chip breaking The tool drills at the programmed feedrate (F) until the 1st infeed
depth is reached. Once this depth is reached, the tool is retracted by a
withdrawal distance (V2) for chip breaking and is then inserted again
down to the next drilling depth. It repeats this process until the final
drilling depth (Z1) is reached.
The specified amount can be defined either per machine data or in the
parameter screenform. If the parameter is pre-assigned via machine
data, it does not appear in the parameter screen.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for deep hole drilling with Help display for deep hole drilling with
chipbreaking stock removal

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-177
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Stock removal The drill retracts from the workpiece for unclamping.
"Chip breaking" The drill is retracted by the specified amount V@ for chip breaking.
Tip The final drilling depth (Z1) refers to the drill tip
Shank The final drilling depth (Z1) refers to the drill shank
Z1 Final drilling depth (incr.) mm
D Max. infeed mm
DF Percentage for each additional infeed %
DF=100: Infeed increment remains unchanged
DF<100: Infeed increment is reduced in direction of final drilling depth
Example application: Last infeed was 4mm; DF is 80
Next infeed = 4 x 80% = 3.2mm
Next infeed = 3.2 x 80% = 2.56mm etc.
V1 Minimum infeed mm
Parameter V1 is provided only if DF< 100 has been programmed.
If the infeed increment becomes minimal, a minimum infeed can be programmed in
parameter "V1".
V1 < infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed increment.
V1 > infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed value
programmed under V1.
V2 Specified amount or defined per machine data – for chip breaking only mm
Amount by the which the drill is retracted for chip breaking.
V2=0: The tool is not retracted but remains in place for one rotation.
V3 Limit distance – for unclamping only mm
Distance to last infeed depth that the drill approaches at rapid traverse after
unclamping.
Automatic: The limit distance is calculated by ShopMill.
DT Dwell time for relief cut s
U

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-178 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

3.7.4 Boring

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the programmed position,

allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. It is then inserted
into the workpiece at the feedrate programmed under F until it reaches
the programmed depth (Z1). The spindle stops are a specific position
there. "Lift off contour" or "Do not lift off contour" can be programmed
on expiry of the dwell time.

With retraction, withdrawal distance D and the tool orientation angle α

can either be defined via machine data or in the parameter screen. If
both parameters are pre-assigned via machine data, they do not
appear in the parameter screen.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select with soft keys Boring

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for boring

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Lift off contour The cutting edge is retracted from the bore edge and then moved back to the return
plane.
Do not lift off The cutting edge is not retracted, but traverses back to the safety clearance in rapid
contour traverse.
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" soft key). mm
DT Dwell time for relief cut s
U
D Withdrawal (retract) distance (or defined in machine data) - only for retraction mm
α Tool orientation angle (or defined via machine data) - only for retraction Degrees

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-179
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7.5 Tapping

Function

The tool travels with non-rotating spindle in rapid traverse first to the
retraction plane and then to the safety distance. The spindle begins to
rotate there and the spindle speed and feedrate are synchronized.
Then the tool travels on to the programmed position and is inserted to
depth (Z1).

A compensating chuck is not required.

The spindle speed can be controlled by the spindle override during

tapping. The feed override is inoperative during this process.

Select with soft keys Spindle Tapping

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for tapping

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

P Pitch mm/rev
The pitch is determined by the tool used. in/rev
MODULE: Typical in worm gears that grip the toothed wheel. MODULE
Turns/"
Turns/'': Typical in pipe thread for example.
When you enter in turns/'', enter the whole number before the decimal point in the
first parameter field and the number after the decimal point as a fraction in the
second and third fields.
For example, enter 13.5 turns/'' in the following way:
Z1 Tapping depth (abs. or incr.) mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" soft key). mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-180 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

3.7.6 Thread cutting

Function

You can use a form cutter to machine any type of right-hand or left-
hand thread.
Threads can be machined as right-hand or left-hand threads and from
top to bottom or vice versa.

Select with soft keys Spindle Cut

thread

Inside thread Sequence of operations:

• Position on thread center point on return plane in rapid traverse
• Infeed at rapid traverse to reference plane shifted forward by
amount corresponding to safety clearance
• Approach along an approach circle calculated in the control at
programmed feedrate
• Approach motion to thread diameter on circular path
• Cut thread along a spiral path in clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction (depending on whether it is left-hand or right-hand thread)
• Exit motion along a circular path in the same rotational direction at
programmed feedrate
• Retract to thread center point and then to return plane in rapid
traverse

Note that the tool must not exceed the following value when milling an
inside thread:
Mill diameter < (nominal diameter ∅ – 2 * thread depth K)

Outside thread Sequence of operations:

• Position on starting point in return plane at rapid traverse
• Infeed at rapid traverse to reference plane shifted forward by
amount corresponding to safety clearance
• Approach along an approach circle calculated in the control at
programmed feedrate
• Approach motion to thread diameter on circular path
• Cut thread along a spiral path in clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction (depending on whether it is left-hand or right-hand thread)
• Exit motion along a circular path in opposite rotational direction at
programmed feedrate
• Retract to return plane in rapid traverse

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-181
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

Select key
to call Help display

Help displays for thread cutting

Parameters Description Unit

Machining type Roughing

Thread cutting up to programmed finishing allowance (U)
Finishing
Direction Depending on the rotational direction of the spindle, a change in direction also
changes the machining direction (climb/conventional).
Z0 to Z1: Machining begins on workpiece surface Z0.
Z1 to Z0: The machining starts at thread depth, e.g. for blind hole tapping
Inside thr. An inside thread is cut.
Outside thr. An outside thread is cut.
Left thr. A left-hand thread is cut.
Right thr. A right-hand thread is cut.
NT Number of teeth in a milling insert.
Single or multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The cutting teeth are entered
in parameter NT. The necessary motions are executed internally by the cycle in such
a manner that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling insert corresponds to the
programmed end position when the thread end position is reached. Depending on
the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the retraction path must be taken into
account at the base of the workpiece.
Z1 Thread length mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" soft key). mm
∅ Nominal thread diameter, example: Nominal diameter of M12 = 12mm mm
P Pitch mm/rev
If the milling insert has several teeth, the pitch will be dependent on the tool used. inch/rev
When you enter the thread pitch in turns/'', enter the whole number before the MODULE
decimal point in the first parameter field and the number after the decimal point as a Turns/"

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-182 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

fraction in the second and third fields.

For example, enter 13.5 turns/'' in the following way:
K Thread depth mm
DXY Infeed per cut mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio --> plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
U Finishing allowance mm
α0 Starting angle Degrees

Programming example for Cut circular pocket in a solid blank and cut a thread.
thread cutting The milling tool cannot cut across center. The circular pocket will
therefore have to be predrilled with a Ø22mm drill. The milling tool can
then be inserted centrally.

Using position patterns, the positions of the above-mentioned cycles

can be programmed (see Section "Using position patterns in milling").

Y Y
A
56 A-B
50

B
60 X 40 Z

Workshop drawing of circular pocket with thread

Extract from machining plan; cut a circular pocket with thread

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-183
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7.7 Drill and thread milling

Function

You can use a drill and thread milling cutter to manufacture an internal
thread with a specific depth and pitch in one operation. This means
that you can use the same tool for drilling and thread milling, a change
of tool is superfluous.
The thread can be machined as a right- or left-hand thread.

Sequence of operations:
• The tool travels at rapid traverse to the safety distance.
• If pre-drilling is required, the tool travels at a reduced drilling
feedrate to the pre-drilling depth defined in a machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

• The tool drills with drill feedrate F1 to the first drilling depth D. If the
final drilling depth is not reached, the tool will travel back to the
workpiece surface in rapid traverse for stock removal. Then the
tool will travel at rapid traverse to a position 1mm above the drilling
depth previously achieved - allowing it to continue drillling at drill
feedrate F1 at the next infeed.
• If another feedrate FR is required for through-boring, the residual
drilling depth ZR is drilled with this feedrate.
• If required, the tool travels back to the workpiece surface for stock
removal before thread milling at rapid traverse.
• The tool travels directly to the starting position for thread milling.
• The thread milling is carried out (climb milling, conventional milling
or conventional milling + climb milling) with milling feedrate F2. The
thread milling acceleration path and deceleration path is traversed
in a semicircle with concurrent infeed in the tool axis.

Select with soft keys Spindle Drill and

thread mill.

Select key
to call Help display

Displays for drill and thread milling cutter

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-184 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

F1 Drilling feedrate mm/min
mm/rev
Z1 Drilling depth mm
D Maximum infeed mm
DF Percentage for each additional infeed increment %
DF=100: Infeed increment remains unchanged
DF<100: Infeed increment is reduced in direction of final drilling depth Z1
Example: Last infeed 4mm; DF 80%
Next infeed = 4 x 80% = 3.2mm
Infeed after next infeed = 3.2 x 80% = 2.56mm etc.
V1 Minimum infeed mm
Parameter V1 is provided only if DF<100 has been programmed.
If the infeed increment becomes minimal, a minimum infeed can be programmed in
parameter "V1".
V1 < infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed increment.
V1 > infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed value
programmed under V1.
Pre-drilling When drilling, start initially with a reduced feedrate.
The reduced drilling feedrate results as follows:
Drilling feedrate F1 < 0.15mm/rev: Pre-drilling feedrate = 30% of F1
Pre-drilling feedrate F1 ≥ 0.15mm/rev: Pre-drilling feedrate = 0.1mm/rev
Through-drilling When drilling the residual drilling depth ZR drill with feedrate FR.
ZR Residual drilling depth (for through-drilling only) mm
FR Feedrate through-drilling (for through-drilling only) mm/min
mm/rev
Stock removal Return to workpiece surface for stock removal before thread milling.
Thread Right-hand thread
Left-hand thread
F2 Milling feed mm/min
mm/tooth
P Pitch in/rev
When you enter the thread pitch in turns/'', enter the whole number before the Turns/"
decimal point in the first parameter field and the number after the decimal point as a
fractional number in the second and third fields.
For example, enter 13.5 turns/'' in the following way:
Z2 Retraction before thread milling mm
Z2 is for defining the thread depth in the direction of the tool axis. Z2 is relative to
the tool tip.
∅ Nominal thread diameter mm
Machining Climb milling: Mill thread in one cycle.
direction Conventional milling: Mill thread in one cycle.
Conventional milling + climb milling: Mill thread in two cycles: rough cutting is
performed by conventional milling with defined allowances, then finish cutting is
performed by climb milling with milling feedrate FS.
FS Milling feed finish cutting (for conventional milling + climb milling only) mm/min
mm/tooth

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-185
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7.8 Position on freely programmable positions and position patterns

Function

After you have programmed the machining technologies, you must

program the positions. ShopMill offers a variety of positioning patterns,
i.e.
• Freely programmable positions
• Position on a line or matrix
• Position on a full or pitch circle

You can program any number of these position patterns one after the
other. They are traversed in the order in which you program them.

The programmed technologies and subsequently programmed

positions are automatically chained by the control.

Machining sequence and The first tool in the program traverses all programmed positions, e.g.
tool travel path center all positions. The second tool in the program then machines all
programmed positions, etc. This process is repeated until every
programmed drilling operation has been performed at every
programmed position.

Inside a position pattern or on the approach from one position pattern

to the next, the tool is retracted to safety clearance in the case of
optimized retraction, or otherwise to the return plane (see also Section
"Create new program; define a blank"). The new position is then
approached in rapid traverse.

If the position pattern consists of only one position, the tool is retracted
to the return plane after machining.

Select with soft keys Positions

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-186 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

3.7.9 Freely programmable positions

Function

This pattern allows you to program positions freely, i.e. rectangular or

polar, in the X/Y plane. Individual positions are approached in the
order in which you program them. Press soft key "Delete all" to delete
all positions programmed in X/Y.

Select with soft keys Positions

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Freely programmable Help display for "Freely programmable
positions, rectangular" positions, polar"

Parameters Description Unit

Rectangular/ Programming with rectangular or polar dimensions.

polar
Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm
X0 1st Position of the hole in X (abs. or incr.) mm
Y0 1st Position of the hole in Y (abs. or incr.) mm
Rectangular:
X1 ... X8 Other positions in the X axis (abs. or incr.) mm
Y1 ... Y8 Other positions in the Y axis (abs. or incr.) mm

If you want to program further positions, store the ones you have already
programmed and then open the parameter input form again by pressing soft key
"Any positions".
Polar:
L1 ... L7 Position distance (abs.) mm
α1 ... α7 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.

If you want to program further positions, store the ones you have already
programmed and then open the parameter input form again by pressing soft key
"Any positions".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-187
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7.10 Line position pattern

Function

You can use this function to program any number of positions spaced
at the same distance along a line.

Select with soft keys Positions

Position the cursor in the "Line/matrix" field. You can toggle between
Matrix and Line by means of soft key "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Line"

Parameters Description Unit

Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm

This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
X0 Reference point (first position) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
Y0 Reference point (first position) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
α0 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.
L Position spacing. mm
N Number of positions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-188 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

3.7.11 Matrix position pattern

Function

You can use this function to program any number of positions spaced
at an equal distance along one or several parallel lines.

Select with soft keys Positions

Position the cursor in the "Line/matrix" field. You can toggle between
Matrix and Line by means of soft key "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Matrix"

Parameters Description Unit

Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm

This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
X0 Reference point (first position) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
Y0 Reference point (first position) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
α0 Angle of rotation of matrix in relation to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
L1 Position spacing in X direction in relation to an angle of 0 degrees. mm
L2 Position spacing in Y direction in relation to an angle of 0 degrees.
N1 Number of positions in X direction in relation to an angle of 0 degrees.
N2 Number of positions in Y direction in relation to an angle of 0 degrees.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-189
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7.12 Full circle position pattern

Function

This function can be used to program drill holes on a circle with a

defined radius. The basic angle of rotation (α0) for the 1st position is
relative to the X axis. The control calculates the angle of the next hole
position as a function of the total number of holes. The angle it
calculates is identical for all positions.

The tool can approach the next position along a linear or circular path.

The tool approaches the positions on a The tool approaches the positions
linear path. The result may be a contour on the programmed circular path.
violation in a circumferential groove. No contour violation results in a
circumferential groove.

Approach positions on a linear or circular path

Select with soft keys Positions

If you position the cursor on the "Full/pitch circle" field, you can toggle
between the two options using soft key "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Full circle of holes"

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-190 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

Parameters Description Unit

Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm

X0 X position of full circle center point (abs. or incr.) mm
Y0 Y position of full circle center point (abs. or incr.) mm
α0 Basic angle of rotation; angle of 1st hole in relation to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in CW direction.
R Radius of full circle mm
N Number of positions on full circle
FP Feed for positioning on a circular path. mm/min
Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached at the programmed feedrate (FP) along a
circular path.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-191
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7.13 Pitch circle position pattern

Function

This function can be used to program holes on a pitch circle with a

defined radius.
The tool can approach the next position along a linear or circular path.
(please see "Full circle" for detailed description).

Select with soft keys Positions

If you position the cursor on the "Full/pitch circle" field, you can toggle
between the two options using soft key "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Pitch circle"

Parameters Description Unit

Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm

X0 X position of pitch circle center point (abs. or incr.) mm
Y0 Y position of pitch circle center point (abs. or incr.) mm
α0 Basic angle of rotation; angle of 1st position in relation to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Pitch circle is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Pitch circle is rotated in CW direction.
α1 Advance angle; after the first hole has been drilled, all further positions are Degrees
approached at this angle.
Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in a CCW direction.
Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in a CW direction.
R Radius of pitch circle mm
N Number of positions (holes) on the pitch circle
FP Feed for positioning on a circular path. mm/min
Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached at the programmed feedrate (FP)
along a circular path.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-192 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

3.7.14 Obstacle

Function

If there is an obstacle between 2 position patterns, it can be crossed.

The height of the obstacle can be programmed absolutely or
incrementally.

If all positions in the 1st pattern have been machined, the tool axis
travels in rapid traverse to a height corresponding to the obstacle
height + safety clearance. The new position is approached in rapid
traverse at this height. The tool axis then approaches a position
corresponding to Z0 of the position pattern + safety clearance.

Select with soft keys Positions Obstacle

Note Obstacles are registered only if they lie between 2 position patterns.
If the tool change point and the programmed return plane are
positioned below the obstacle, the tool travels to the return plane
height and on to the new position without taking the obstacle into
account. The obstacle must not be higher than the return plane.

Programming example Drilling 4 positions with an obstacle in-between.

The holes are first centered and then drilled. When you have
programmed the first two positions at X=15, you need to program the
obstacle. The remaining positions are then programmed at X=100.

Safety clearance (SC)

Z Z=20

Z=0

Z=-20
X
30

46

15
100

Workshop drawing

Extract from machining plan for "Obstacle" programming example

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-193
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

3.7.15 Repeat positions

Function

If you want the tool to re-approach positions that you have already
programmed, the "Repeat positions" function is a quick and easy
solution.

You must specify the number of the position pattern. This is a number
assigned automatically by ShopMill. You will find it inserted after the
block number in the machining plan.

Extract from machining plan, position pattern number=001

Select with soft keys Repeat

positions

After you have entered the position pattern number, e.g. 1, press soft
key "Accept". The position pattern you have selected is then
approached again.

Extract from machining plan; repeat positions in block no. 60

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-194 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.7 Drilling

3.7.16 Programming examples for drilling

Drilling at different heights Machining task: You have already cut a recess in a workpiece. You now
want to machine blind and through holes of Ø 12mm on this workpiece with
different machining planes.
Programming:
Center the 4 holes
Deep drill the blind holes with stock removal
Deep drill the through holes with chipbreaking

Tool

Return plane

Safety
Z clearance
Z0
for Z=0
Z-14
Safety
clearance
for Z= -36 Z-36

Z-50
X

Y 4 holes
Diameter 12mm
30
12

25
60 Rapid traverse
X Machining feedrate

Workshop drawing

Extract from machining plan

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-195
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.7 Drilling

Drilling with a You want to machine through holes with screw head recesses around
counterbore a pitch circle on a workpiece.
When you program the counterbore, you must select offset value D2
(see Section "Create tool offset block for tool edge 1/2").

Z 15 Cut A-B
9

8.5
30
X

45
80

60
Y
40

A
50
100

Workshop drawing

Extract from machining plan

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-196 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

3.8 Milling

3.8.1 Face milling

Function

You can use this cycle to face mill any workpiece. A rectangular
surface is always machined. The rectangle results from corner points
1 and 2 that are pre-assigned with the values of the blank part
dimensions from the program header.
The cycle differentiates between roughing and finish cutting.
Roughing:
• Several material removal operations on surface
• Tool turns above the workpiece edge

Finishing:
• First material removal operation on surface
• Tool turns at safety distance in the X/Y plane
• Retraction of mill

Depth infeed always takes place outside the workpiece.

How far the milling tool can travel beyond the workpiece when face
milling is defined in a machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select with soft keys Face

milling

Then select the machining strategy using the vertical soft keys.

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for face milling, alternate Help display for face milling, alternate
machining directions in parallel to X axis machining directions in parallel to Y axis

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-197
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

Help display for face milling, one milling Help display for face milling, one machining
direction in parallel to X axis direction in parallel to Y axis

Parameters Description Unit

Machining type Roughing:

Face milling up to programmed finishing allowance (UZ).
Finishing:
The surface is milled once in the plane. The tool is retracted after every cut.
X0, Y0 Corner point 1 of surface in X or Y direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Z0 Height of blank (abs. or incr.)
X1 Corner point 2 of surface in X direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Y1 Corner point 2 of surface in Y direction (abs. or incr.)
Z1 Height of finished part (abs. or incr.)
DXY Max. infeed in the XY plane (dependent on mill diameter) mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio ! plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. infeed in Z direction mm
UZ Finishing allowance mm

• Define corner point 1 of the surface where machining is to begin.

• The same finishing allowance must be entered for both roughing
and finishing. The finishing allowance is used to position the tool for
retraction.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-198 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

Programming example You want to cut to a depth of 10mm on a workpiece surface. 8mm must be
Face milling removed in a rough cut and 2mm in a finish cut. The cutter diameter is
40mm.
Blank dimensions: X0=0, Y0=0, Z0=10, X1=100 abs., Y1=50 abs., Z1=0 abs

Roughing
Finishing
ZO=10

UZ=2
Z1=0

Z
Z=-40
100

Face milling: Roughing and finishing

Face milling, roughing Face milling, finishing

Extract from machining plan; Roughing and finishing in face milling

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-199
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

3.8.2 Rectangular pocket

If you want to mill a rectangular pocket, use the "Rectangular pocket"

function.

The following machining variants are available:

• Mill rectangular pocket from complete material.
• First pre-drill the rectangular pocket in the center if, for example,
the mill is not centered (program the blocks pre-drill, circular pocket
and position in succession).
• Machine pre-machined rectangular pocket (see "Machining"
parameter).

Depending on the dimensions of the rectangular pocket in the

workpiece drawing, you can select a corresponding reference point for
the rectangular pocket.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center of the pocket at rapid traverse at
the height of the return plane and infeeds at safety clearance.
2. The pocket is machined according the selected insertion strategy.
3. The tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Machining type You can select machining type when milling the rectangular pocket:
• Roughing
During roughing, the individual planes of the pocket are machined
one after the other from the center point until depth Z1 is reached.
• Finishing
During finishing, the edge is always machined first. The edge of
the pocket is approached on the quadrant that joins the corner
radius. The base is finished from the center during the last infeed.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is carried out in the same way as finishing, only the
last infeed (base finishing) is omitted.

Select with soft keys Pocket Rectangular

pocket

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-200 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for milling a rectangular pocket

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Position of 5 different positions for the reference point can be selected:
reference point • Pocket center
• Lower left-hand corner
• Lower right-hand corner
• Upper left-hand corner
• Upper right-hand corner
The reference point (highlighted in yellow) is displayed in the Help screen.
Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Finishing on edge
Single pos. A rectangular pocket is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several rectangular pockets are machined in a position pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch
circle, matrix, etc.).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
W Pocket width mm
L Pocket length mm
R Radius at pocket corners mm
α0 Angle of rotation of pocket in relation to X axis. Degrees
Z1 Depth of pocket in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed in plane (XY direction) mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio ! plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) mm
Insertion You can select several insertion strategies:
Helical: Insertion along spiral path
The cutter center point traverses along the spiral path determined by the radius and
depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
Oscillation: Insertion with oscillation along center axis of pocket
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-201
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

Once it has reached the required depth, it traverses the path again without depth
infeed in order to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
Center: Insert vertically in center of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the
pocket has been predrilled.
EP Max. insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) mm
EW Insertion angle (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees
FZ Depth infeed rate (for insertion in center only) mm/min
mm/tooth
Solid Complete machining:
machining The pocket must be milled from a solid workpiece (e.g. casting).
Remachining:
A small pocket or hole has already been machined in the workpiece. This needs to
be enlarged in one or several axes. You must program parameters AZ, W1 and L1
for this purpose.
AZ Depth of premachined pocket (for remachining only) mm
W1 Width of premachined pocket (for remachining only) mm
L1 Length of premachined pocket (for remachining only) mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-202 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

Programming example You wish to cut a rectangular pocket, starting with a rough cut operation and
followed by a finish cut. Since the cutting tool you are using cannot cut across
center, the workpiece needs to be predrilled first with a drill of Ø 20mm.

120
80 Predrilled
Diameter 20mm

90
50
Y
Finishing allowance 1mm

Reference point of rectangular pocket

Workpiece drawing of the rectangular pocket

Rough cut a rectangular pocket Finish cut a rectangular pocket

Extract from machining plan; predrilling and milling a rectangular pocket

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-203
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

3.8.3 Circular pocket

Use the "Circular pocket" function if you want to mill any kind of
circular pocket.

The following machining variants are available:

• Mill circular pocket from complete material.
• First pre-drill the circular pocket in the center if, for example, the
mill is not centered (program the blocks pre-drill, circular pocket
and position in succession).
• Machine pre-machined circular pocket (see "Machining"
parameter).

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the center point of the pocket
at the height of the return plane and at safety clearance.
2. The pocket is machined according the selected insertion strategy.
3. The tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Machining type You can select any machining type when milling the circular pocket:
• Roughing
During roughing, the individual planes of the pocket are machined
one after the other from center point until depth Z1 is reached.
• Finishing
During finishing, the edge is always machined first. The edge of
the pocket is approached on the quadrant that joins the pocket
radius. The base is finished from the center during the last infeed.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is carried out in the same way as finishing, only the
last infeed (base finishing) is omitted.

Select with soft keys Pocket Circular

pocket

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-204 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for milling a circular pocket

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Finishing on edge
Single pos. A circular pocket is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several circular pockets are machined in a position pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch
circle, matrix, etc.).
The positions refer to the center point of the circular pocket:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
∅ Diameter of pocket mm
Z1 Depth of pocket in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed in plane (XY direction) mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio ! plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) mm
Insertion: You can select several insertion strategies:
Helical: Insertion along spiral path
The cutter center point traverses along the spiral path determined by the radius and
depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
Feedrate: Machining feedrate
Center: Insert vertically in center of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket.
Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ
Note: The vertical insertion into pocket center method can be used only if the tool
can cut across center or if the workpiece has been predrilled.
EP Max. insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-205
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

FZ Depth infeed rate (for insertion in center only) mm/min

mm/tooth
Solid Complete machining:
machining The pocket must be milled from a solid workpiece (e.g. casting).
Remachining:
A small pocket or hole has already been machined in the workpiece. This needs to
be enlarged. Parameters AZ, and ∅ must be programmed.
AZ Depth of premachined pocket or hole (for remachining only) mm
∅1 Diameter of premachined pocket or hole (for remachining only) mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-206 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

3.8.4 Rectangular spigot

Use the "Rectangular spigot" function if you want to mill various

rectangular sipgots.

The following forms are available with or without corner radius:

Rectangular spigots

Depending on the dimensions of the rectangular spigot in the

workpiece drawing, you can select a corresponding reference point for
the rectangular spigot.

In addition to the desired rectangular spigot, you must also define a

blank spigot. The blank spigot defines the area outside which there is
no material, i.e. rapid traverse can be used there. The blank spigot
must not overlap adjacent blank spigots and is placed by ShopMill
automatically on the finished spigot in a centered position.

The spigot is only machined with one infeed. If you want to machine
with more than one infeeds, you must program the function
"Rectangular spigot" several times with a smaller final machining
allowance.

Contour 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the
approach/retraction height of the return plane and infeeds at safety clearance. The
starting point is located on the positive X axis rotated through α0.
2. The tool approaches the spigot contour along the semicircle at
machining feedrate. The tool first executes infeed at machining
depth and then moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a
function of the programmed machining direction
(climb/conventional) in a CW or CCW direction.
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool retracts
from the contour along the semicircle and infeeds to the next
machining depth.
4. The spigot is approached in a semicircle again and
circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the
programmed spigot depth is reached.
5. The tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-207
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

Contour approach

Contour retraction

Contour approach/retraction along semi-circle with CW rotating spindle and

conventional milling operation

Select with soft keys Spigot Rectangular

spigot

Select key
to call Help display

Help displays for milling rectangular spigots

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Reference You can select 5 different reference points:
point • Spigot center
• Bottom left
• Bottom right
• Top left
• Top right
Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Single pos. A rectangular spigot is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several rectangular spigots are machined in a position pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch
circle, matrix, etc.).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
W Width of spigot after machining mm
L Length of spigot after machining mm
R Radius at edges of spigot (corner radius) mm
α0 Angle of rotation Degrees

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-208 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

Z1 Depth of spigot (abs. or incr.) mm

DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane in relation to length (L) and width (W) of the spigot; mm
Smaller spigot dimensions are obtained by calling the cycle again and programming
it with a lower finishing allowance.
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (tool axis) mm
W1 Width of blank spigot (important for determining approach position!) mm
L1 Length of blank spigot (important for determining approach position!) mm

3.8.5 Circular spigot

Use the "Circular spigot" function if you want to mill a circular spigot.

In addition to the desired circular spigot, you must also define a blank
spigot. The blank spigot defines the area outside which there is no
material, i.e. rapid traverse can be used there. The blank spigot must
not overlap adjacent blank spigots and is placed by ShopMill
automatically on the finished spigot in a centered position.

The spigot is only machined with one infeed. If you want to machine
with more than one infeeds, you must program the function "Circular
spigot" several times with a smaller final machining allowance.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool travels at rapid traverse to the starting point at the height
of the return plane and infeeds at safety clearance. The starting
point is always located on the positive X axis.
2. The tool approaches the spigot contour from the side of semicircle
at machining infeed. The tool first executes infeed at machining
depth and then moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a
function of the programmed machining direction
(climb/conventional) in a CW or CCW direction.
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool exits the
contour along a semi-circle in the plane and then infeeds to the
next machining depth.
4. The contour is then approached again in a semi-circle and the
spigot traversed once. This process is repeated until the
programmed spigot depth is reached.
5. The tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-209
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

Contour approach

Contour retraction

Contour approach/retraction along semi-circle with CW rotating spindle and

conventional milling operation

Select with soft keys Spigot Circular

spigot

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for milling a circular spigot

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Single pos. A circular spigot is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several circular spigots are machined in a position pattern (e.g. full circle, matrix,
line).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
∅ Diameter of spigot after machining mm
Z1 Depth of spigot (abs. or incr.) mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-210 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm

UXY Finishing allowance in plane (spigot diameter) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) mm
∅1 Diameter of blank spigot mm
(important for determining approach position)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-211
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

3.8.6 Mill longitudinal slot

Use the "Longitudinal slot" function if you want to mill any kind of
longitudinal slot.

The following machining variants are available:

• Mill longitudinal slot from complete material.
• Predrill longitudinal slot, for example, when where you are using a
cutter that cannot cut across center (program the program blocks
Predrill, Rectangular pocket and Position one after the other).

Depending on the dimensions of the longitudinal slot in the workpiece

drawing, you can select a corresponding reference point for the
longitudinal slot.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves at rapid traverse on the return plane and infeeds at
safety clearance.
2. The slot is then machined according the selected insertion strategy.
3. The tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Machining type You can select any machining type for milling the longitudinal slot:
• Roughing
During roughing, the individual planes of the slot are machined
one after the other until depth Z1 is reached.
• Finishing
The edge is always machined first when finishing. The edge of the
slot is thereby approached on the quadrant which joins the corner
radius. The base is finished from the center during the last infeed.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is carried out in the same way as finishing, only the
last infeed (base finishing) is omitted.

Select with soft keys Slot Longitu-

dinal slot

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for a longitudinal slot

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-212 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Reference The reference point position must be defined:
point • Center point of longitudinal slot:
• Inside left
• Inside right
• Left-hand edge
• Right-hand edge
Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Finishing on edge
Single pos. A longitudinal slot is milled at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several longitudinal slots are milled in a position pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch circle,
matrix, etc.).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
W Slot width mm
L Slot length mm
α0 Angle of rotation Degrees
Z1 Slot depth mm
DXY Max. infeed in plane (XY direction) mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio ! plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) mm
Insertion The tool can be inserted vertically over slot center (Mi) or with mm
oscillating motion (Pe):
Center=Insert vertically in center of longitudinal slot:
The tool is inserted to infeed depth in the pocket center.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center.
Oscillation=Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot:
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed.
Once it has reached the required depth, it traverses the path again without depth
infeed in order to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
FZ Depth infeed rate (for insertion in center only) mm/min
mm/tooth
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-213
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

3.8.7 Circumferential slot

Use the "Circumferential slot" function if you want mill one or more
circumferential slots of the same size on a full or partial circle.

Tool size Note that the mill for machining the circumferential slot must not be
less than a defined minimum size:
• Roughing:
1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ miller diameter
• Finishing:
1/2 slot width W ≤ miller diameter
• Finishing on edge
Finishing allowance UXY ≤ Milling diameter

Annular slot If you want to create an annular slot, you must enter the following
values for parameters Number N and Aperture angle α1 :
N=1
α1 = 360°

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center of the semicircle at rapid traverse
at the end of the slot at the height of the return plane and infeeds at
safety clearance.
2. Then, the tool enters the workpiece at machining infeed (taking into
consideration the maximum infeed in the Z direction and the
finishing allowance). The circumferential slot is machined as a
function of the machining direction (climb or conventional) in a CW
or CCW direction.
3. When the circumferential slot is completed, the tool approaches
the return plane in rapid traverse.
4. The next circumferential slot is approached on a straight line and
then machined.
5. The tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-214 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

Machining type You can select any machining type for milling the circumferential slot:
• Roughing
During roughing, the individual planes of the slot are machined
one after the other from center point of the semicircle at the end of
the slot until depth Z1 is reached.
• Finishing
During finishing, the edge is always machined until depth Z1 is
reached. The edge of the slot is approached on the quadrant that
joins the radius. The last infeed finishes the base from the center
point of the semicircle at the end of the slot.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is carried out in the same way as finishing, only the
last infeed (base finishing) is omitted.

Select with soft keys Slot Circumfe-

rential slot

You can toggle between the "Full circle" and "Pitch circle" positioning
patterns with soft key "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for circumferential slot as full and pitch circle

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

FZ Infeed depth mm/min
mm/tooth
Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Finishing on edge
Full circle The slots are positioned around a full circle. The slot spacing is uniform and
calculated by the control.
The slots are positioned around a pitch circle. The slot spacing can be determined
Pitch circle on the basis of angle α2.
The positions refer to the center point:
X0 Position in X direction, abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction, abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height, abs. or incr. mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-215
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

W Slot width mm
R Radius of circumferential slot mm
α0 Angle of rotation in relation to X axis Degrees
α1 Arc angle of a slot Degrees
α2 Advance angle (for pitch circle only) Degrees
N Number of slots
Z1 Depth of slot in relation to Z0 mm
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in XY plane (edge of slot) mm
Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached at the programmed feedrate FP along a
circular path.
FP Feed for positioning on a circular path mm/min

3.8.8 Use of position patterns for milling

Function

If you want to mill a pocket, spigot or longitudinal slot at different

positions, you need to program a separate positioning block. When
you call the milling cycle, use soft key "Alternat." to select "Pos.
pattern" in the "Single position" parameter field. The parameters for
single positions X0, Y0 and Z0 then disappear from the display.

Extract from the parameter form of a rectangular pocket with "Pos. pattern" entry

After you have finished programming the cycle and stored it, you need
to program the position pattern.

Select with soft keys Positions

ShopMill automatically chains the milling cycle and the subsequently

programmed position pattern.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-216 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.8 Milling

Programming example 1 You want to mill 12 mutually parallel rectangular pockets at an angle of 15
degrees. Arrangement on matrix: 4 columns, 3 rows.
Blank dimensions: X=115mm, Y=80mm, Z=30mm
Rectangular pocket dimensions: Length 20mm, width 10mm, depth 8mm
Corner radius 1.5mm.
You have selected "Bottom left" as the pocket reference point.

Parameter input fields for rectangular pocket and position pattern

Programming graphic, rectangular pockets on matrix at angle of 15 degrees

Extract from machining plan; milling rectangular pockets on a matrix

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-217
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.8 Milling

Programming example 2 You want to rough cut 6 longitudinal slots on a full circle of Ø 32mm. The
slots are rotated through 30 degrees.
Blank dimensions: X=100mm, Y=100mm, Z=20mm
Slot dimensions: Length 28mm, width 16mm, depth 5mm
You have selected "center point" as the slot reference point.

Parameter input fields for longitudinal slot and position pattern

Programming graphic, longitudinal slots at angle of 30 degrees on full circle

Extract from machining plan; milling longitudinal slots on a full circle

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-218 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.9 Measurements

3.9 Measurements

3.9.1 Measure workpiece zero

If you want to use an electronic measuring probe in a program to

determine the workpiece zero, use the "Workpiece zero" function.
For example, if you want to produce several workpieces, an offset may
occur between the old and the new workpiece when clamping the next
workpiece to the vice. You can measure the workpiece edges to
determine the new work zero and save it in a work offset.

X0 new
Clamping
X0 old
on vise

Probe Workpiece

Offset

Workpiece clamping with offset in relation to previous clamping

Even if you want to machine several clamped workpieces in parallel,

you can determine the zero for each workpiece first.

Y
Probe
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 3

Workpiece 2 Workpiece 4

Several clamped workpieces

You can use electronic measuring probes exclusively to determine the

workpiece zero within a program. These must be calibrated
beforehand (see Section "Calibrate electronic measuring tool"). These
measuring probes must always be specified as 3D probe in the tool
management.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-219
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.9 Measurements

During automatic measurement, the measuring probe first moves at

rapid traverse and then at measuring infeed to the edge of the
workpiece and back. The measuring infeed is defined in a machine
data.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The workpiece radius is considered during calculation of the

workpiece zero and is stored in a work offset.

! Insert an electronic measuring probe in the spindle (see Section

"Tool, Program offset value and spindle speed").

Workpiece ! Select the "Various" and "Workpiece zero" soft keys.

zero >

X Z
! Use the soft keys to select in which axis direction you want to
... approach the workpiece first.

! Specify the values for the individual parameters.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

! Repeat the process for the other two axes.

Parameters Description Unit

T Tool of type 3D probe

X Approach position in X direction (abs.) mm
Y Approach position in Y direction (abs.) mm
Z Approach position in Z direction (abs.) mm
Zero off. Work offset where the workpiece zero is to be saved.
• Basic work offset
• Work offset (the values are saved in the coarse offset and existing values in the
fine offset are deleted.)
• GUD data (you to scan the measurement result in GUD E_MEAS, e.g. for other
calculations (tolerance checks, etc.)).
Approach +: The probe approaches the workpiece in the plus direction
direction –: The probe approaches the workpiece in the minus direction
At the approach position in the Z direction, this parameter does not apply as the tool
can only approach the workpiece in a negative direction!
X0, Y0, Z0 Setpoint position of the workpiece edge mm

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-220 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.9 Measurements

3.9.2 Measure tool

Use the "Measure tool" function if you want to check the tool wear
while machining the workpiece.

You can only measure the tools within a program using an electronic
measuring probe, which you must calibrate the probe first.

You can consider a lateral or longitudinal offset V when measuring. If

the maximum length of the tool is not at the utmost outside of the tool
the maximum width is not at the utmost bottom of the tool, you can
store this difference in the offset.

Longitudinal offset Lateral offset

ShopMill then calculates the tool wear data from the known positions
of the toolholder reference point and of the probe and from the tool
offset data. The wear values are automatically entered in the wear list
and added to any existing values stored there.

If the wear exceeds the maximum permissible value for tool wear ∆L
or ∆R, the tool is replaced and disabled against further use. If no
replacement tool is available, the machining operation is interrupted.

During the measuring cycle, the tool approaches the measuring probe
automatically at measuring infeed and then returns to the initial
position.
ShopMill automatically executes the measurement with either a
rotating or stationary spindle depending on the tool type and selected
measurement method (measure radius/length).

! Move the tool until it is positioned over the approximate center of

the measuring surface of the probe (see Section "Straight or
circular path motion").

Measure ! Press the "Various" and "Measure tool" soft keys.

tool >

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-221
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.9 Measurements

Measure Measure ! Use the soft keys to select whether you want to measure the
length -or- radius radius or the length of the tools.

Parameters Description Unit

T Tool to be measured
D Cutting edge of the tool
V Lateral offset (if necessary) – for length measurement only mm
Longitudinal offset (if necessary) – for radius measurement only mm
∆L Max. permissible wear value (see tool data sheet supplied by tool manufacturer) – mm
applies only to length measurement
∆R Max. permissible wear value (see tool data sheet supplied by tool manufacturer) – mm
applies only to radius measurement

3.9.3 Calibrate the measuring probe

If you want to use a measuring probe to measure your tools, you must
first determine the position of the probe on the machine table relative
to the machine zero.
You can determine this position either within a program (see below) or
during preparation (see Section "Operation" " "Calibrate the
measuring probe").

You must use a mill-type calibration tool to calibrate the measuring

probe. You must enter the length and radius/diameter of the tool in the
tool list beforehand.

Calibration is automatically executed at the measuring feedrate.

The distance measurements between the machine zero and
measuring probe are calculated and stored in an internal data area.

! Insert the calibration tool (see Section "Tool, Program offset value
and spindle speed").

! Move the calibration tool until it is positioned over the approximate

center of the measuring surface of the measuring probe (see
Section "Straight or circular path motion").

Measure ! Press the soft keys "Various" and "Measure tool".

tool >
Calibrate ! Press soft key "Calibrate probe".
probe
! Choose whether you want to calibrate the length or the length and
diameter of the probe.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-222 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

3.10 Miscellaneous functions

3.10.1 Call subroutine

If you need the same machining steps for programming different

workpieces, you can define these machining steps as a separate
subroutine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs. Thus
you no longer need to program the same machining steps several
times.

ShopMill does not differentiate between main program and subroutine.

This means that you can call a "standard" ShopMill or G code program
as subroutine in another ShopMill program. In turn, you can call
another subroutine in the subroutine. The maximum nesting depth is 8
subroutines.
You cannot insert subroutines among chained blocks.

If you want to call a ShopMill program as a subroutine, the program

must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in
Machine Auto mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines.

The subroutine must always be stored in the main NC memory. If you

want to call a subroutine that is located on another drive, you can use
the G code command "EXTCALL".

Call subroutine
"Tasche_b"

Call subroutine

Please note that when a subroutine is called, ShopMill evaluates the

settings in the program header of the subroutine. These settings
remain effective after the subroutine was terminated. If you want to
retain the settings from the program header of the main program,
delete the settings in the program header of the subroutine.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-223
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

! How to create a ShopMill or G code program that you can call as a

subroutine in another program.

! Position the cursor in the machining plan of the main program on

the program block after which you want to call the subroutine.

Sub- ! Press the "Various" and "Subroutine" soft keys.

routine

! Specify the path of the program if the subroutine you want to run is
not contained in the same directory as the main program.

! Enter the name of the subroutine you want to insert.

You can specify the file ending (*.mpf or *.spf) if necessary. If you
only enter the program name, ShopMill will assign the extension.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

The subroutine call is inserted in the main program.

3.10.2 Repeat program blocks

If specific steps need to be carried out repeatedly when machining a

workpiece, then you only need to program these machining steps
once. ShopMill offers a function for repeating program blocks.

The program blocks you want to repeat, must be characterized by a

start and end marker. These program blocks can then be called up to
9,999 times within a program. The markers must all be unambiguous,
i.e. have different names.
You can also set markers and repeats any time later, but not within
chained program blocks.

Further, you can use the same marker as end marker for the
preceding program blocks and as start marker for the following
program blocks.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-224 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

Start marker

End marker

Repeat

Repeat program blocks

Set ! Press the "Various" and "Set marker" soft keys.

marker
! Specify a name.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

The start marker is inserted after the current block.

! Specify the program blocks you would like to repeat later.

Set ! Press the "Various" and "Set marker" soft keys.

marker
! Specify a name.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

The end marker is inserted after the current block.

! Continue programming until the location where the program

blocks are to be repeated.

Repeat ! Select the "Various" and "Repeat" soft keys.

! Specify the name of the start marker and end marker as well as
the number of repeats.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

The marked program blocks are repeated.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-225
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

3.10.3 Change program settings

All parameters defined in the program header, with the exception of

the unit of measurement, can be changed at any location in the
program.

The settings in the program header are modal, i.e. they are effective
until they are changed.
Define a new blank, e.g. in the ShopMill program, if you want to
change the visible cutout during simulation. This is useful for the work
offset, coordinate transformation, cylinder peripheral surface
transformation and swiveling functions. First program the functions
listed above and then define a new blank.

Settings ! Select soft keys "Various" and "Settings".

>
! Enter the parameter of your choice.
For a description of the parameters, please refer to section
"Create new program".

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

The new settings for the program take effect.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-226 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

3.10.4 Call work offsets

You can call work offsets (G54 etc.) from any program.
You can use these offsets, e.g., if you want to machine workpieces
with different blank part dimensions in one and the same program.
The offset then shifts the workpiece zero for the new blank.

YM
Y

X
ZO2

Y Y

X X
ZO1 ZO3

X
M

Work offset in X and Y directions

You define the work offsets in the work offset list (see Section "Define
work offsets"). You can also see the coordinates of the selected offset.

Transfor- ! Press the "Various", "Transformations" and "Work offset" soft

mations >
keys.
Work
offset >
! Select one of the work offsets or the basic offset.

-or-

! Enter the desired offset directly in the input field.

-or-

Work ! Press the "Work offset" soft key.

offset >
The work offset list is opened.

-and-

! Select a work offset.

-and-

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-227
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

to ! Press the "To program" soft key.

program
The work offset is transferred to the parameter screen.

If you want to deselect the work offset, select the basic offset or enter
a zero in the field.

3.10.5 Define coordinate transformation

To facilitate programming, you can transform the coordinate system.

Make use of this opportunity, e.g., if you want to rotate the coordinate
system.

Coordinate transformations are only valid in the current program.

You can define a translation, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can
choose between a new or an additive coordinate transformation.
With a new coordinate transformation all previously defined coordinate
transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate transformation
is effective in addition to the currently selected coordinate
transformation.

• Translation
You can program a translation of the zero point for each axis.

New offset Additive offset

• Rotation
You can rotate every axis around a specific angle. A positive angle
corresponds to a counterclockwise rotation.

New rotation Additive rotation

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-228 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

• Scaling
You can specify a scale factor both for the active machining plane
and for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are multiplied
by this factor.

Note that the scaling always refers to the zero point of the workpiece.
If, for example, you want to increase the size of a pocket whose center
point does not coincide with the zero point, then the pocket center
point is shifted in the scaling.

New scaling ad alin g

Additive scaling
i ve
dit
Sc

t
Offse Rotation
new additive

Translation, rotation and scaling

• Mirroring
You can also mirror all axes.
Specify the axis you want to mirror.

Note that with mirroring, the travel direction of the cutting tool
(conventional/climb) is also mirrored.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-229
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

New mirroring Additive mirroring

Mirroring on the X axis

Mirroring the X axis

Transfor- ! Press the "Various" and "Transformation" soft keys.

mations >

Offset Mirroring ! Use the soft keys to select the coordinate transformation.
> ... >

! Choose whether you want to program a new or an additive

coordinate transformation.

! Enter the coordinates of your choice.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-230 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

3.10.6 Cylinder peripheral surface transformation

Function

Cylinder peripheral surface transformation is required to machine

• longitudinal slots on cylindrical solids,
• cross slots on cylindrical solids,
• any other slot shapes on cylindrical bodies.

The cylinder peripheral surface transformation is a software option.

The shape of the slots is programmed with reference to the developed

level cylinder surface area. The slot can be programmed as a
line/circle contour, via drilling or milling cycles or with the contour
milling function (free contour programming).

There are two types of cylinder peripheral surface transformation:

• Slot side compensation off
• Slot side compensation on (path milling only)

Slot side compensation When slot side compensation is

OFF deactivated, any type of slot with
parallel sides can be machined if
the tool diameter equals the slot
width.
Longitudinal slot Cross slot

The slot sides are not parallel if the

Slot side compensation off
slot width is larger than the tool
diameter.

The slot contour is programmed for machining purposes.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-231
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

Slot side compensation ON When slot side compensation is

active, slots with parallel sides are
machined even if the slot width is
larger than the tool diameter.

Longitudinal slot
limited in parallel, slot
side compensation on

The slot contour must not be programmed for machining purposes,

but the imaginary center-point path of a bolt inserted in the slot; the
bolt must be in contact with all sides of the slot. The slot width is
determined by parameter D (see also Section "Example 5: Slot side
compensation".)

Programming The basic programming procedure is as follows:

1. Select work offset for cylinder surface transformation (e.g. offset

the zero point on the center point of the cylinder end face)
2. Position the Y axis (Y axis must be positioned prior to cylinder
surface transformation because it is defined differently after
transformation)
3. Activate cylinder peripheral surface transformation
4. Select work offset for machining on developed cylinder surface
(e.g. shift zero point to the zero point on the workpiece drawing)
5. Program machining operation (e.g. enter contour and path milling)
6. Deactivate cylinder peripheral surface transformation

The programmed cylinder peripheral surface transformation is

simulated only as a developed peripheral surface.

The work offsets active prior to selection of cylinder surface

transformation are no longer active after the function has been
deselected.

Select with soft keys Transfor- Cylinder

mations > surface >

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-232 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

Parameters Description Unit

Transformation Activate/deactivate cylinder peripheral surface transformation (see also example

below)
∅ Cylinder diameter (only when transformation is active) mm
Slot side comp. Activate/deactivate slot side compensation (only when transformation is active)
D Offset to the programmed path mm
(only when slot side compensation is
active)

Options for free contour programming

General For contours (e.g. slots) on a cylinder, lengths in the circumferential
direction of the cylinder peripheral surface (e.g. Y axis) are often
specified as angles.
Several options are available under the "Mill contour" function in free
contour programming for this purpose.
Depending on the selected axis (selection is made via a display
machine data), you can enter the length as an angle.

Start point In the screen form for selecting the start point, you can also activate or
deactivate the cylinder peripheral surface transformation function via
the "Alternat." soft key. When the function is active, you are offered
the diameter ∅ of the cylinder.

Contour elements Depending on the axis and the relevant element, angle parameters α,
Iα or Yα, Jα are added to the "Horizontal/vertical/diagonal line" and
"Arc" when the cylinder peripheral surface transformation function is
active.

Notes
• The dimensions of the developed surface are specified in mm in
the graphic!
• You must delete the Y value before you can enter an angular value
for Yα in the start screen form.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-233
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

3.10.7 Swiveling

Function

You can use swivel heads or swivel tables to create and/or machine
inclined planes.

It is not necessary to program the swivel axes of the machine (A, B,

C), since you can program the rotations around the geometry axes
(X, Y, Z) of the workpiece coordinate system directly as described in
the relevant workpiece drawing.
The rotation of the workpiece coordinate system in the program is then
automatically converted to a rotation for the relevant swivel axis of the
machine during machining.

You must always swivel the machining plane so that it lies

perpendicular to the tool axis for subsequent machining. During
machining, the machining plane is permanently set.

When the coordinate system is swiveled, the previously set work offset
is automatically converted for the swiveled state.

The basic programming procedure is as follows:

1. Swivel the coordinate system into the plane to be machined.

2. Program the machining operation for the unswiveled plane.
3. Swivel coordinate system back to its original position.

When approaching the programmed machining operation in the

swiveled plane, in an unfavorable case the software limit switch could
be overtraveled as infeed movement always first takes place in the
X/Y plane then in Z direction. To avoid this, before swiveling, e.g.
move the tool in the X/Y plane and position it as close as possible to
the starting point of the machining operation or define the retraction
plane closer to the workpiece.

In a swiveled plane the "Workpiece zero" function is operative but not

the "Measure tool" function.
The swiveled coordinates are retained in reset state and even after
power ON, i.e. you can still retract from an inclined hole by retracting
in Z+ direction.

The following provides an explanation of the most important

parameters for swiveling:

Undercut Before swiveling the axes you can move the tool to a safe retraction
position. This position is specified when you set up swiveling in the
"Retraction position" parameter.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-234 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

Warning
If you are not going to retract the tool to the safe position, you must
ensure that no collisions can occur between tool and workpiece during
swiveling.

Swiveling Select if you only want to swivel the coordinate system or actually want
to move the swivel axes too. If you want to perform a machining
operation in the swiveled plane, you will need to be able to move the
swivel axes.

Swivel variants The coordinate system can be swiveled either axially or via solid or
projection angles. The machine manufacturer determines when setting
up the "Swivel" function which swiveling variants are available.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

• With the axial swiveling variant, the coordinate system is rotated

about the individual axes sequentially, which each rotation
commencing directly from the previous rotation. The axis sequence
is freely selectable.
• With the swiveling variant based on solid angles, the coordinate
system is rotated first about the Z axis and then in negative
direction about the Y axis. The second rotation commences directly
from the first.
• When swiveling via projection angle, rotation is carried out about
two axes simultaneously, i.e. you can view two axes at the same
time. The third rotation is based on the first two.
You can select any of the axes.
This variant can be used for inclined holes, for example, where the
angle in the side views of the workpiece drawing have dimensions.
The side views correspond to non-rotated coordinate system.

The positive direction of rotation for each of the different swivel

variants can be found in the Help displays.

Direction In swivel systems with 2 rotary axes, a particular position can be

reached in two different ways, i.e. either via a CW or a CCW rotation.
The geometry of the swivel head or table is such that the head or table
assumes two different positions depending on the selected direction.
This may affect the working area. You can choose between these two
different positions in the "Direction" parameter. If one of the two
positions cannot be reached for mechanical reasons, the alternative
position is automatically selected irrespective of the setting of the
"Direction" parameter.
When swiveling is set up, the entries in the "Direction" parameter
determine for which rotary axis you can choose between the two
settings.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-235
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

Fix tool tip To avoid collisions, you can use the 5-axis transformation (software
option) to retain the position of the tool tip. Whether this function is
available is determined by the machine manufacturer's settings in the
"Follow-up tool" parameter when setting up the "Swivel" function.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select with soft keys Transfor-

Swivel
mationen

Parameters Description Unit

TC Name of swivel data block

0: Remove inclinable head
No entry: No change to set swivel data block
T Tool name
Undercut Z: Move tool axis to retraction position before swiveling
Z, X, Y: Move machining axes to retraction position before swiveling
No: Do not move tool to retraction position before swiveling
Swiveling Yes: compute and swivel (swivel coordinate system and move swivel axes)
No: only compute, don't swivel (only swivel coordinate system, don't move swivel
axes)
Transformation Transformation (swiveling) additive or new
X0 Reference point for rotation mm
Y0 Reference point for rotation mm
Z0 Reference point for rotation mm
Swivel variant Axial swiveling, or swiveling via solid or projection angle
X Axis angle (axial swivel) The sequence of axes Degrees
Y Axis angle (axial swivel) can be changed round Degrees
Z Axis angle (axial swivel) as required Degrees
α Angle of rotation in the XY plane about the Z axis (swiveling via solid angle) Degrees
β Angle of rotation in space about the Y axis (swiveling via solid angle) Degrees
Xα Axis angle (swiveling via projection angle) The sequence of axes Degrees
Yα Axis angle (swiveling via projection angle) can be changed round Degrees
Zβ Axis angle (swiveling via projection angle) as required Degrees
X1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Y1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Z1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Direction Preferred direction of rotation with 2 alternatives
+: Larger angle of axis on the scale of the swivel head/table
–: Smaller angle of the axis on the scale of the swivel head/table

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-236 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

Fix tool tip Correct: The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.
Do not correct: The position of the tool tip is changes during swiveling.

Other additive transformations can be added to the offsets before

(X0, Y0, Z0) or after (X1, Y1, Z1) swiveling (see Section "Work
offsets").

Programming example You want to bevel a corner on a cube.

The machining plane is to be the inclined surface, i.e. the machining

plane must be swiveled as follows:

• With axial swiveling and swiveling using solid angles, the system of
coordinates is rotated first in the XY plane in such a way that the
upper edge of the inclined surface of the cube runs parallel to the X
axis (rotate 45° about Z axis or α=45°). The system of coordinates
is then tilted so that the inclined plane of the cube is in the XY
plane (rotate –54.736° about Y axis -54.736° or β=54.736°).
• With the swiveling via projection angles options, the X and Y axes
are rotated through 45° so that the inclined plane of the cube is in
the XY plane. The Z axis is then rotated through 30° so that the X
axis runs through the center point of the inclined surface (zero point
of rotated surface).
Z
Workpiece Y
zero
X

30°
Zero point
of rotated 45°
45° area

Reference
point for
rotation
View of left-hand side

50

54.736°
50

50

45°
25
25

25
Plan view A View A

Workpiece machined by an inclinable head

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-237
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

Swivel (axial) Swivel (solid angle) Swivel (projection angle)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-238 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

3.10.8 Miscellaneous functions

You can e.g. position the spindle again between the individual
machining steps or activate the coolant or stop machining.

The following functions are available:

• Spindle
Determine direction of spindle rotation or spindle position (see
Section "Start, stop and position spindle manually")
• Gear stage
Set gear stage, if machine has gears
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

• Miscellaneous M functions
Machine functions, such as "Close door"; they are additionally
provided by the machine manufacturer
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

• Coolant
Activate/deactivate coolant 1/2
• Tool-spec. fct 1 to 4
Select tool-specific functions 1 to 4; they are additionally provided
by the machine manufacturer
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

• Dwell time
Set time after which execution on the machine is continued
• Programmed stop
Stop execution on the machine if the "Programmed Stop" soft key
is also active (see Section "Program control").
• Stop
Stop execution on the machine

Machine ! Press the "Straight circle" and "Machine func." soft keys.
funct.
! Enter the parameter of your choice.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-239
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.11 Insert G code in the ShopMill program

3.11 Insert G code in the ShopMill program

Function

You can program G code blocks within a ShopMill program, as well as

insert comments to explain the program.

Explanation
For a detailed description of G code blocks to DIN 66025, please refer
to:
References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
/PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

You cannot create G code blocks before the program header, after the
program end and within chained program blocks.

ShopMill does not display G code blocks in programming graphics.

If you want to stop workpiece machining at specific locations in the

program, program the G code command "M01" in the machining plan
at these locations (see Section "Control program run").

G code in ShopMill program

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-240 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 3 3
11.02 Programming with ShopMill
3.11 Insert G code in the ShopMill program

Operating sequence

! In the machining plan of a ShopMill program, position the cursor

on the program block after which you want to insert a G code
block.

! Press the "Input" key.

! Specify the desired G code commands or comment.

The comment must always start with a semi-colon (;).

In the machining plan, the newly created G code block is characterized

by the "G" preceding the block number.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 3-241
 3 3
Programming with ShopMill 11.02
3.11 Insert G code in the ShopMill program

Notes

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

3-242 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 4 4
11.02 Programming with G Code

Programming with G Code

4.1 Create a G code program ....................................................................................... 4-244

4.2 Execute G code program ........................................................................................ 4-247

4.3 G code editor........................................................................................................... 4-249

4.4 Arithmetic parameters ............................................................................................. 4-252

4.5 ISO dialects ............................................................................................................. 4-253

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 4-243
 4 4
Programming with G Code 11.02
4.1 Create a G code program

4.1 Create a G code program

If you do not want to program with the ShopMill functions, you can also
generate a G code program with G code commands in the ShopMill
user interface.

You can program a G code command to DIN 66025.

In addition, the parameter screens offer support for measuring and
programming contours, drilling and milling cycles. G code is generated
from the individual screens; you can compile the code back to the
screens again. The measuring cycles and cycle support function must
be set up by the machine manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

For a detailed description of G code blocks to DIN 66025 and the

cycles and measuring cycles, please refer to:
References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
/PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
/PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810
/BNM/, User's Guide Measuring Cycles
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

If you want to obtain further information about specific G code

commands or cycle parameters on the PCU 50, you can call up
context-sensitive online help.

For a detailed description of the online help, please refer to:

References: /BAD/, Operator's Guide HMI Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Creating a G code
program
! Press the "Program" soft key.

! Select the directory where you want to create a new program.

New G code ! Press the "New" and "G code program" soft keys.
program
! Enter a program name.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.
You can use any letters, digits or the underscore symbol (_).
ShopMill automatically replaces lower case with upper case.

! Press the "OK" soft key or the "Input" key.

-or- The G code editor is opened.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

4-244 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 4 4
11.02 Programming with G Code
4.1 Create a G code program

! Specify the desired G code commands.

Call tool
Continue
Tools
! Press the "Continue" and "Tools" soft keys when you want to
>
select a tool from the tool list.

-and-

! Position the cursor on the tool you want to use for machining.

-and-

To ! Press the "To program" soft key.

program
The selected tool is validated in the G code editor.
Text such as the example below is displayed at the current cursor
position: T="MILL30"

In contrast to ShopMill programming, the settings made in the tool

management do not become active automatically when the tool is
called.
This means that you must also program the tool change (M6), the
direction of spindle rotation (M3/M4), the spindle speed (S...), the
coolant (M7/M8) and any other tool-specific functions required.

Example:
...
T="MILL" ;call tool
M6 ;change tool
M7 M3 S2000 ;deactivate coolant and spindle
...

Support
Contour Mill
! Use the soft keys to select whether you want support for
... programming contours, drilling or milling cycles.

Create ! Use the soft key to select the required cycle.

contour ...
! Enter the parameters.

OK
! Press soft key "OK".

The cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.

! Position the cursor in the G code editor on a cycle if you want to

open the associated parameter screen again.

Recompile ! Press the "Recompile" soft key.

The parameter screen of the selected cycle is displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 4-245
 4 4
Programming with G Code 11.02
4.1 Create a G code program

Edit
If you want to return directly to the G code editor from a parameter
screen, press the "Edit" soft key.

Measuring cycle support

! Switch to the extended horizontal soft key bar.

Measure ! Press soft key "Measure mill".

mill
Calibr. ! Use the soft key to select the required measuring cycle.
probe ...
! Enter the parameters.

OK
! Press soft key "OK".

The measuring cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.

! Position the cursor in the G code editor on a measuring cycle if

you want to open the associated parameter screen again.

Recompile ! Press the "Recompile" soft key.

The parameter screen of the selected measuring cycle is displayed.

Edit
If you want to return directly to the G code editor from a parameter
screen, press the "Edit" soft key.

Online help (PCU 50)

! Position the cursor in the G code editor on a G code command or
in a cycle support parameter screen on an input field.

! Press the "Help" key.

The relevant help is displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

4-246 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 4 4
11.02 Programming with G Code
4.2 Execute G code program

4.2 Execute G code program

When executing a program, the workpiece is machined according to

the programming on the machine.
After program start in automatic mode, workpiece machining then runs
automatically. You can, however, stop the program at any time and
then resume machining again.

To control the programming results in the simplest manner, without

traversing the machine axes, you can graphically simulate program
execution on the screen.
For more information about simulation, please refer to the section on
"Simulation".

The following requirements must be met before executing a program

on the machine:
• The NC's measuring system is synchronized with the machine.
• You have a program created in G code.
• The necessary tool offsets and work offsets are entered.
• Any necessary safety interlocks from the machine manufacturer
are activated.

When executing a G code program, the same functions are available

as for executing a ShopMill program (see Section "Machine
workpiece").

Simulate a G code
program
! Press the "Program" soft key or the "Program Manager" key.
-or- ! Position the cursor on the required G code program.

! Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" soft key.

-or- The program is opened in the G code editor.

! Press the "Simulation" soft key.

The entire program execution is graphically displayed on the screen.

Edit
If you want to return directly to the G code editor from the simulation,
press the "Edit" soft key.

Execute a G code
program
! Press the "Program" soft key or the "Program Manager" key.
-or- -and-

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 4-247
 4 4
Programming with G Code 11.02
4.2 Execute G code program

! Position the cursor on the required G code program.

-and-

Execute ! Press soft key "Execute".

-or-

! Press the "Execute" soft key if you are currently in the "Program"
operating area.

ShopMill automatically changes to "Machine Auto" operating mode

and loads the G code program.

! Press the " Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
Execution of the G code program is initiated on the machine.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

4-248 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 4 4
11.02 Programming with G Code
4.3 G code editor

4.3 G code editor

If you want to change the order of the program blocks within a G code
program, delete G code or copy from one program to another, use the
G code editor.

If you want to change the G code in a program that you are currently
executing, you can only change the G code blocks that have not yet
been executed. These blocks are specially highlighted.

The G code editor provides the following functions:

• Select
You can select any G code.
• Copy/Insert
You can copy and insert G code both within the same program and
between different programs.
• Cut
You can any cut G code and delete it this way. The G code remain
in the clipboard so that you can insert it at another location.
• Search/replace
In a G code program you can search for any character string and
replace it with another one.
• To beginning/end
In the G code program, you can easily jump to the beginning or the
end.
• Numbering
If you insert a new or copied G code block between two existing G
code blocks, ShopMill automatically assigns a new block number.
This number might be higher than the block number in the next
block. You can use the "Renumber" function to number the G code
blocks again in ascending order.

If you create or open a G code program, you are automatically in the G

code editor.

Select G code
! Position the cursor on the location in the program where you want
to start your selection.

Mark ! Press the "Mark" soft key.

! Position the cursor on the location in the program where you want
to end your selection.

The G code is selected.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 4-249
 4 4
Programming with G Code 11.02
4.3 G code editor

Copy G code

! Select the G code you want to copy.

Copy ! Press the "Copy" soft key.

The G code is stored in the clipboard and remains there even if you
change to another program.

Insert G code

! Copy the G code you want to insert.

Insert ! Press the "Insert" soft key.

The copied G code is inserted from the clipboard in front of the cursor
position.

Cut G code

! Select the G code you want to cut.

Cut ! Press the "Cut" soft key.

The selected G code is cut and stored in the clipboard.

Search G code

Search ! Select soft key "Search".

A new vertical soft key bar is displayed.

! Specify the character string you want to search for.

! Press soft key "OK".

The G code program is searched in downwards direction for the

character string. The search result is marked by the cursor in the
editor.

Continue ! Press the "Continue search" soft key if you want to continue the
search
search.

The next found character string is displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

4-250 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 4 4
11.02 Programming with G Code
4.3 G code editor

Find G code and replace

Search ! Select soft key "Search".

A new vertical soft key bar is displayed.

Search/ ! Select soft key "Search/Replace".

Replace
! Specify the character string you want to find and the characters
you want to insert instead.

! Press soft key "OK".

The G code program is searched in downwards direction for the

character string. The search result is marked by the cursor in the
editor.

Replace ! Press the "Replace all" soft key if you want to replace each
all
occurrence of the character string in the entire G code program.

-or-

Find next ! Press the "Find next" soft key if you want to continue searching
without replacing the searched character string.

-or-

Replace ! Press the "Replace" soft key if you want to replace this occurrence
of the character string at this location in the G code program.

Jump to start/end

Continue To ! Press the "Continue" and "To start" or "To end" soft keys.
> start
The beginning or end of the G code program is .
To
end

Renumber G code blocks

Continue Re- ! Press the "Continue" and "Renumber" soft keys.

> number >
! Specify the number of the first block and the increment for the
block numbers (e.g. 1, 5, 10).

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

The blocks are renumbered.

You can cancel the numbering again by entering 0 as the block
number or incrementation.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 4-251
 4 4
Programming with G Code 11.02
4.4 Arithmetic parameters

4.4 Arithmetic parameters

R variables (arithmetic parameters) are variables that you can use

within a G code program.
R variables can be read and written by the G code programs. In the R
variable list you can assign a value to R variables that are read.

Input and deletion of R variables can be disabled via the keyswitch.

Display an R variable

! Press the "Tools WOs" or "Offset" key.

-or-
! Press the "R variable" soft key.

This opens the R variable list.

Find an R variable
Search ! Select soft key "Search".

! Enter the parameter number you want to find.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

The parameter you are looking for is displayed.

Edit an R variable
! Position the cursor on the input field of the parameter you want to
modify.

! Specify the new value.

The new value of the parameter becomes immediately effective.

Delete an R variable
! Position the cursor on the input field of the parameter whose value
you want to delete.

! Press the "Backspace" key.

This deletes the value of the parameter.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

4-252 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 4 4
11.02 Programming with G Code
4.5 ISO dialects

4.5 ISO dialects

ISO dialect0 M programs (Fanuc0 milling) can also be executed under
ShopMill. These are read in and out via the RS-232 interface.

ISO dialect0 M programs are not programs that were created with the
SIEMENS G code. See the section 4.1 Create a G code program.

Read in program An ISO dialect0 M program is read in by the same method as a

ShopMill program.
ISO dialect0 M programs which you read in are stored as main
programs in the ShopMill directory.

Execute a program Before you can execute an ISO dialect0 M program, you must make
the following settings:
1. A tool offset data set (geometry and wear data) must be assigned
to every H number in the ISO dialect0 M program.
Add the tool geometry data in column "H" of the tool list with the
appropriate H number. Each data set must have a unique H
number; only replacement tools may have the same H number as
another set.
2. Each ISO dialect0 M program must be preceded by command
"G291". Command "G290" marks a return to the Siemens program.

In ISO dialect0 M programs, the tool cutting edge number is not

shortened to D but to E.
You can display specific ISO dialect G functions by pressing the "G
functions" soft key.

Read out program An ISO dialect0 M program is read out by the same method as a
ShopMill program.
Select punched tape/ISO format as the output format.

You can view the assignments between Siemens work offsets and
ISO dialect0 M work offsets in a table.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

"

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 4-253
 4 4
Programming with G Code 11.02
4.5 ISO dialects

Notes

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

4-254 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 5 5
11.02 Simulation

Simulation

5.1 General ................................................................................................................... 5-256

5.2 Start/abort program ................................................................................................. 5-256

5.3 Representation as a plan view ................................................................................ 5-258

5.4 Representation as a 3-plane view........................................................................... 5-259

5.5 Zoom a finished part viewport ................................................................................. 5-260

5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part.................................................. 5-261

5.6.1 Change position of finished part.............................................................................. 5-261
5.6.2 Cut open finished part ............................................................................................. 5-262
5.6.3 Update finished part display.................................................................................... 5-262

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 5-255
 5 5
Simulation 11.02
5.1 General

5.1 General
Function

To simulate the machining process, the control system completely

calculates the currently selected program and displays the result in
graphic form.

You can select the following modes of representation for simulation:

• Plan view
• 3-plane view
• Volume model

The simulation function displays tools and workpiece contours in their

correct proportions. Cylindrical die-sinking cutters, bevel cutters, bevel
cutters with corner rounding and tapered die-sinking cutters are
displayed as end milling tools.

Transformation of the coordinate system by means of the work offset,

coordinate transformation, cylinder peripheral surface transformation
and swiveling functions are not automatically displayed. In order view
the machining operations after a transformation, you can define a new
blank in the program (see Section "Change program settings").

5.2 Start/abort program

Function

Start program
Precondition You have selected the program you want to simulate, i.e.
• a ShopMill program or a
• G code program
and called it in the Program Editor.

Press soft key "Simulation".

In the case of ShopMill programs, the dimensions of the blank for

simulation are taken from the program header.

If a subroutine is called in the program, ShopMill evaluates the

program header of the subroutine and uses the blank defined there for
graphically displaying the part. The settings from the subroutine
header remain effective, even after the subroutine has been executed.
If you want to retain the blank used in the main program, delete the
data relating to the blank in the subroutine header.

With G code programs, you must specify the dimensions of the blank
or the selected viewport yourself.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

5-256 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 5 5
11.02 Simulation
5.2 Start/abort program

Settings With a G code program, select soft key "Settings" and enter the
dimensions of your choice (see also Section "Create a new program;
define a blank").
These dimensions are stored for simulation of the next G code
program. If you set the "Blank" parameter to "off", the dimensions will
be deleted.

Starts the program.

Processing time The processing time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the

approximate time that would actually be required to execute the
machining program on the machine (incl. tool change).
The timer is stopped if the program is interrupted.

Abort program

End
Press the "End" soft key if you want to cancel the simulation.

The program is restarted when you press soft key "Simulation".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 5-257
 5 5
Simulation 11.02
5.3 Representation as a plan view

5.3 Representation as a plan view

Function

You can display the contour as a plan view by pressing this soft key.
A depth display indicates the current depth at which machining is
currently taking place.
The following applies with respect to depth display in this graphic:
"The deeper, the darker".

Select with soft key Top view

Example of a plan view display of a finished part:

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

5-258 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 5 5
11.02 Simulation
5.4 Representation as a 3-plane view

5.4 Representation as a 3-plane view

Function

The process is represented as a plan view with 2 sections, similar to a

technical drawing.
Functions for zooming viewports are provided in the 3-plane view.

Select with soft key

Example of a 3-plane view of a finished part:

Shift cutting planes The cross-hair can be positioned in the plan view to display the cutting
plane in the respective side view. Example of a volume model
(finished part):

To reveal concealed contours, you can shift the cutting planes to any
position you want in the 3-plane display. This way you can make
hidden contours visible.

Shift with keys ...

in the ...
y plane

x plane

z plane

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 5-259
 5 5
Simulation 11.02
5.5 Zoom a finished part viewport

5.5 Zoom a finished part viewport

Function

Functions for displaying a more detailed representation of a finished

part are available

• in the plane view and

• in the 3-plane display.

Select with soft key Details

Zoom a viewport Soft keys/keys Meaning

To You return to the initial display
origin

Zoom You can use soft key "Zoom +" or "Zoom –" to
+
display the current screen contents in a higher or
Zoom lower resolution. Use the cursor or "Paging" keys
–
to position the cross-hair in the center of the
selected viewport.

Note:
+ The same functions are provided by the "+" and "-"
keys on the operator panel.

Auto Press this soft key to display a window-

Zoom
proportionate representation of all travel paths in
the graphic display area.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

5-260 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 5 5
11.02 Simulation
5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part

5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part

Function

The finished part is displayed as a volume model. The simulation

window displays the current machining status.
You can display concealed contours and views on the volume model
by
• changing the position about the vertical axis or
• cutting open the volume model at the desired point.

Select with soft key

Example of a volume model (finished part):

5.6.1 Change position of finished part

Select with soft key Details

Select views You can select one of the following views:

Left-hand side of part from front

Right-hand side of part from front

Right-hand side of part from rear

Left-hand side of part from rear

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 5-261
 5 5
Simulation 11.02
5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part

5.6.2 Cut open finished part

Precondition You have selected one side of the finished part.

Select with soft key

Shift cutting planes To make concealed contours visible, shift the cutting planes using the
cursor and "Paging" keys (see also Section "Representation in 3-plane
view") to any position.

Update The new setting is updated when you select this soft key.

Example of a cut volume model (finished part):

5.6.3 Update finished part display

Precondition You are in "Volume model" representation mode and have started the
program.
Update While you are testing the program, the 3D representation of the
finished part is refreshed to correspond to the latest machining status
every time you press soft key "Update".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

5-262 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management

File Management

6.1 Manage programs with ShopMill............................................................................. 6-264

6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20 .............................................................................. 6-265

6.2.1 Open program ......................................................................................................... 6-267
6.2.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 6-268
6.2.3 Multiple clamping .................................................................................................... 6-268
6.2.4 Execute G code program from floppy disk drive or network drive .......................... 6-271
6.2.5 Create new directory/program................................................................................. 6-272
6.2.6 Select several programs ......................................................................................... 6-273
6.2.7 Copying/renaming directories/programs ................................................................. 6-274
6.2.8 Deleting directories/programs ................................................................................. 6-275
6.2.9 Execute program via RS-232 interface ................................................................... 6-276
6.2.10 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface.............................................................. 6-277
6.2.11 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 6-279
6.2.12 Save/read in tool data/zero point data..................................................................... 6-279

6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50 .............................................................................. 6-282

6.3.1 Open program ......................................................................................................... 6-284
6.3.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 6-285
6.3.3 Multiple clamping .................................................................................................... 6-286
6.3.4 Loading/unloading program .................................................................................... 6-288
6.3.5 Execute G code program from hard disk, floppy disk drive or network drive.......... 6-289
6.3.6 Create new directory/program................................................................................. 6-291
6.3.7 Select several programs ......................................................................................... 6-292
6.3.8 Copying/renaming/moving directories/programs .................................................... 6-293
6.3.9 Deleting directories/programs ................................................................................. 6-295
6.3.10 Execute program via RS-232 interface ................................................................... 6-296
6.3.11 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 6-298
6.3.12 Save/read in tool data/zero point data..................................................................... 6-298

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-263
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.1 Manage programs with ShopMill

6.1 Manage programs with ShopMill

All programs that you have created in ShopMill for machining

workpieces are stored in the main NC memory.
You can access these programs at any time via the Program Manager
to execute them, edit, copy or rename them. You can delete programs
you no longer need to free disk space.

ShopMill offers several options for exchanging programs and data with
other workstations:

• Own hard disk (PCU 50 only)

• RS-232 interface
• Floppy disk drive
• Network connection

The following sections describe program management with PCU 20 or

PCU 50 as an alternative.
Find out which PCU your ShopMill software is running on and then
either read Section
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20
or Section
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-264 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

With the ShopMill variant with PCU 20, all programs and data are
stored in the NC main memory.
You can read programs and data in/out via the RS-232 interface.
You can also display the directory structure on diskettes or network
drives.

ShopMill user interface PCU 20

RS-232
interface

edit edit

ShopMill programs ShopMill programs

ShopMill subroutines ShopMill subroutines
G code programs G code programs

Network drive
Diskette drive NC main memory

Data management with PCU 20

The Program Manager provides an overview of all directories and

programs.

Program Manager PCU20

In the horizontal soft key bar you can select the memory medium for
which you want to display directories and programs. In addition to the
"NC" soft key, via which the data in the NC working memory can be

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-265
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

displayed, soft keys 2 to 5 can also be assigned. You can use them to
display the directories and programs on the floppy disk and network
drives:
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

In the overview, the symbols have the following meaning:

! Directory

"
Program

Zero point data/tool data

The directories and programs are always listed together with the
following information:
• Name
The name can consist of max. 24 characters. When the data is
transferred to external systems, the name is truncated after 8
characters.
• Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Zero point data/tool data: INI
• Size (in bytes)
• Date/time (of creation or last change)

ShopMill stores the programs that are created internally for calculating
the stock removal processes in the "TEMP" directory.

Information about memory allocation in the NC is displayed above the

horizontal soft key bar.

Open a directory

# Press the "Program" key or the "Program Manager" key.

-or- The directory overview is displayed.

# Use the soft keys to select the memory medium.

...
# Position the cursor on the directory you want to open.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- All programs in this directory are now displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-266 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

Return to the higher

level directory
# Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor on any line.

-or-

# Position the cursor on the return jump line.

-and-

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

-or- The higher directory level is displayed.

6.2.1 Open program

If you want to look at a program in greater detail, or make changes to

it, display the program in the machining plan.

# Press the "Program" soft key.

The directory overview is displayed.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to open.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or-
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The
machining plan is displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-267
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2.2 Execute a program

You can select all programs that are saved on your system at any time
to use them for machining workpieces automatically.

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to execute.

Execute # Press soft key "Execute".

ShopMill switches to "Machine Auto" operating mode and uploads the

program.

# Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
Workpiece machining is initiated (see also Section "Automatic mode".)

If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press

the "Execute" soft key to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode.
You can start machining the workpiece there by pressing the "Cycle
Start"key.

6.2.3 Multiple clamping

The "Multiple clamping" function provides optimized tool change over

several workpiece clampings. Firstly this shortens the idle times.
Secondly, time is no longer lost for tool changes as - in so far as
possible - all machining of a workpiece in all clampings is performed
first before the next tool change is triggered.

You can use rotating clamping bridges in addition to flat clamping

bridges if supported by the machine manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

You can either execute the same program several times on the
different clampings or select different programs.

The "Multiple clamping for different programs" function is a software

option.

The multiple clamping function creates one single program from

several different programs. The tool sequence within a program
remains unchanged. Cycles and subroutines are not opened, position
patterns are processed as closed units.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-268 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

The individual programs must meet the following requirements:

• ShopMill programs only

• Program must have been tested
• Program for the 1st clamping must have been trial run
• No markers/repetitions, i.e. no branches in the program
• No inch/metric switchover
• No work offsets
• No coordinate transformation (translation, scaling, etc.)
• Contours must have unique names, i.e. the same contour name
must not be called in several different programs
• The "Starting point" parameter must not be set to "manual" in the
stock removal cycle (contour milling).
• No modal settings, i.e. settings that are effective for all subsequent
program blocks (only with multiple clamping for different programs)
• Max. of 50 contours per clamping
• Max. of 49 clampings

You can substitute subroutines for the markers or repetitions which

may not be included in programs for multiple clampings.

# Open the Program Manager.

Continue Multiple # Press the "Continue" and "Multiple clamping" soft keys.
> clamping
# Specify the number of clampings and the number of the first work
offset to be used.
The clampings are processed in ascending sequence from the
start work offset. The work offsets are defined in the "Tools/Work
Offsets" menu (see Section "Work offsets").

# Enter a name for the new, global program (XYZ.MPF).

OK
# Press soft key "OK".

A list is displayed in which the different programs must be assigned to

the work offsets. Not all work offsets, i.e. clampings, must be assigned
to programs, but at least two.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-269
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

Program # Press the "Program selection" soft key.

selection
The program overview is displayed.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to execute.

OK
# Press soft key "OK".

The program is included in the assignment list.

# Repeat this process until a program is assigned to every required

work offset.

On all # If you wish to execute the same program on all clampings, select
clampings
soft key "On all clampings".
You can assign different programs to individual work offsets first,
and then assign one program to the remaining work offsets by
selecting soft key "On all clampings".

Delete Delete all # Press the "Delete selection" or "Delete all" soft key if you want to
selection
clear individual or all programs from the assignment list.

Calculate # Press the "Calculate program" soft key when the assignment list is
program
complete.

This optimizes the tool changes.

The global program is then renumbered. The number of the current
clamping is specified every time the program switches from one
clamping to another.
Apart from the global program (XYZ.MPF), the file XYZ_MCD.INI is
also set up in which the assignment between work offsets and
programs is stored. Both programs are stored in the directory that was
previously selected in the Program Manager.

If you switch from the assignment list (without "Abort" or "Create

program") to another function and then call the "Multiple clamping"
function later on, the same assignment list is displayed again.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-270 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2.4 Execute G code program from floppy disk drive or network drive

If your NC memory resources are low, you can execute G code

programs from floppy disk drive/network drive.
Then instead of loading the entire G code program into the NC
memory before execution, only the first part is loaded. While the first
part is being executed, subsequent program blocks are continuously
loaded.

With execution from floppy disk drive/network drive, the G code

program remains stored on this drive.

You cannot execute ShopMill programs from floppy disk/network drive.

# Open the Program Manager.

# Use the soft keys to select the floppy disk drive/network drive.
...
# Position the cursor on the directory in which you want to execute a
G code program.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- The directory is opened.

# Position the cursor on the G code program that you want to

execute.

Continue Exec. from # Press the "Continue" and "Execution from hard disk" soft keys.
> hard disk
ShopMill switches to "Machine Auto" mode and uploads the G code
program.

# Press the " Start" key.

Cycle Start
Workpiece machining is initiated (see also Section "Automatic mode").
The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC main
memory while the program is being processed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-271
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2.5 Create new directory/program

Directory structures facilitate administration of your programs and

data. You can create as many subdirectories as you want in one
directory.
You can also create programs in a subdirectory/directory and then
create program blocks for the program (see Section "Programming
with ShopMill").
The new program is automatically stored for you in the NC main
memory.

Create a directory

# Open the Program Manager.

New Directory # Press the "New" and "Directory" soft keys.

# Enter a new directory name.

# Press soft key "OK".

The new directory is created.

Create programs
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a

new program.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or-
New # Press the "New" soft key.

ShopMill # Now press the "ShopMill program" soft key if you want to create a
program
ShopMill program.
(See Section "Programming with ShopMill")

-or-

G code # Press the "G code program" soft key if you want to create a G
program
code program.
(See Section "Programming with G code")

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-272 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2.6 Select several programs

In order to copy or delete several programs at once, you can select

multiple programs at once, block by block or individually.

Selecting several
programs block by block
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the first program you want to select.

Mark # Press the "Mark" soft key.

# Broaden your program selection by pressing the cursor up or

-or- down keys.

The entire program block is highlighted.

Selecting several
separate programs
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the first program you want to select.

# Press the "Select" soft key.

# Then move the cursor to the next program you want to select.
-or-
# Press the "Select" soft key again.

The separately selected programs are highlighted.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-273
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2.7 Copying/renaming directories/programs

If you want to create a new directory or program that is to be similar to

an already existing one, you can save time by copying the old directory
or program and then modifying selected programs or program blocks
only.
You can also use the copy and insert capabilities for directories and
programs to exchange data with other ShopMill systems via diskette
or the network drive.
You can also rename directories or programs.

You cannot rename a program if it is loaded in the "Machine Auto"

operating mode at the same time.

Copying
directory/program
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory/program you want to copy.

Copy # Press the "Copy" soft key.

# Select the directory level where you want to insert the copy of your
directory/program.

Insert # Press the "Insert" soft key.

The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory

level. If there already is a directory/program with the same name in
this level, you are prompted whether you want to overwrite the
directory/program or insert it under another name.

# Press the "OK" soft key if you want to overwrite the

directory/program.

-or-

# Specify another name if you want to save the directory/program

under another name.

-and-

# Press soft key "OK".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-274 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

Renaming
directories/programs
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory/program you want to rename.

Rename # Press the "Rename" soft key.

# In the "To:" field, enter the new directory name or program name.
The name must be unique, i.e. you cannot have two directories or
programs with the same name.

# Press soft key "OK".

The directory/program is renamed.

6.2.8 Deleting directories/programs

It is advisable to regularly delete programs or directories that you are

no longer using so that your data management remains clearly
structured and the NC main memory is released again.
Save this data on an external data storage medium if required (see
Section "Read program in/out via RS-232 interface").

Remember when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data, zero
point data and subdirectories contained in this directory are deleted
too.

If you want to release space in the NC memory, delete the contents of

the "TEMP" directory. ShopMill stores the programs that are created
internally for calculating the stock removal processes in this directory.

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory/program you want to delete.

Delete # Press the "Delete" soft key.

The selected directory or program is deleted.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-275
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2.9 Execute program via RS-232 interface

Programs saved on external data storage systems can be executed

directly via the RS-232 interface. This means you do not need to read
these programs in first before using them to machine a workpiece.
If a program needs more memory space for execution than is
available in the NC main memory, the program contents are
continuously loaded via the RS-232 interface.

The RS-232 interface on the controller and on the external data

storage system must be adapted to one another, i.e. you must make
the same settings for each RS-232 interface.

# Open the Program Manager.

Continue Execute # Press the "Continue" and "Execute RS-232" soft keys.
> RS-232
RS-232 # Press the "RS-232 settings" soft key if you want to set up the
settings
interface.

# Make your required settings.

# Press the "Back" soft key.

The interface settings are saved.

# On the other side, select the program that you want to execute.

# Start the transfer on the other system.

Start
# Press soft key "Start".

ShopMill switches to "Machine Auto" mode and uploads part of the

program.

# Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
Workpiece machining is initiated (see also Section "Automatic mode").
The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC main
memory while the program is being processed. After execution via the
RS-232 interface, the program remains stored on the external data
storage system.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-276 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2.10 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface

Programs can be exchanged with other ShopMill stations using an

external data storages system over the RS-232 interface.
In addition, you can use this procedure to swap out data you are not
currently using to free more NC main memory. When you want to use
these swapped out programs again, you can swap them in any time.

When you read a program out from/in to ShopMill, all ShopMill

subroutines are transferred too.
You can also read in/out several programs in one operation.

The RS-232 interface on the controller and on the external data

storage system must be adapted to one another, i.e. you must make
the same settings for each RS-232 interface.

Make sure that you set the correct file format (binary/PC, punched
tape or punched tape/ISO format) when you read out a program.
Otherwise, the other station will not be able to interpret the program.

Read out program

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to read out.

Continue Read out # Select soft keys "Continue" and "Read out".
>
RS-232 # Press the "RS-232 settings" soft key if you want to set up the
settings
interface.

# Make your required settings.

# Press the "Back" soft key.

The interface settings are saved.

All files # Press the "All files" soft key if you want to select all displayed
programs.

# Start the transfer on the other system.

Start # Press soft key "Start".

The selected program and all its ShopMill subroutines are read out.
The "Read out" window displays the name of the program being read
out and the number of transferred bytes.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-277
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

Stop # Press the "Stop" soft key if you want to cancel the data transfer.

# Then press the "Start" soft key again to resume the data transfer
operation.

Read in program
# Open the Program Manager.

Continue Read in # Select soft keys "Continue" and "Read in".

>
RS-232 # Press the "RS-232 settings" soft key if you want to set up the
settings
interface.

# Make your required settings.

# Press the "Back" soft key.

The interface settings are saved.

# On the other system, select the programs you want to read in.

# Start the transfer on the other system.

Start # Press soft key "Start".

The "Read in" window displays the name of the program being read in
and the number of transferred bytes. The program is stored in the
directory stated in the program header.

Stop # Press the "Stop" soft key if you want to cancel the data transfer.

# Then press the "Start" soft key again to resume the data transfer
operation.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-278 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

6.2.11 Display error log

If errors occur during data transfer via the RS-232 interface, ShopMill
records them in an error log.

# Open the Program Manager.

Continue # Press the "Continue" soft key.

>
Read out Read in # Press the "Read out" or "Read in" soft key.
-or-
Error log # Then press the "Error log" soft key.

The data transfer log is displayed.

6.2.12 Save/read in tool data/zero point data

You can also store tool data and zero point settings in addition to
programs.
You can use this function, for example, to save the tool and zero point
data for a specific ShopMill program. If you want to execute this
program again later, you can access these settings quickly.

In this way, you can easily enter tool data that you have determined
using an external tool presetting device into the tool management
system. See:
References: /FBSP/, Description of Functions ShopMill

You can choose which data you want to save:

• Tool data
• Magazine assignments
• Zero points
• Basic zero point

In addition you can determine the scope of the data backup:

• Full tool list/all zero points
• All tool data/zero points used in the program

You can only read out the magazine assignments if your system
provides support for loading and unloading tool data to and from the
tool-holding magazine (see Section "Loading/unloading tools").

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-279
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

Backing up data

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the program for which you want to back up
the tool and zero point data.

Continue Back up # Press the "Continue" and "Back up data" soft keys.
> data
# Select the data you want to back up.

# Change the suggested name if required.

The name suggested as the name for your tool and zero point file
is the name of the originally selected program with the extension
"..._TMZ".

# Press soft key "OK".

The tool/zero point data are saved in the same directory as the
selected program.
If your directory already contains a tool and zero point file with the
same file name, then they are overwritten with the new data.

Read in data

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the backed up tool/zero point data which

you want to read back in again.

Execute # Press the "Execute" soft key or the "Input" key.

-or- The "Read in backup data" window appears.

# Select which data (tool offset data, magazine assignments, zero

point data, basic work offset) you wish to read in.

# Press soft key "OK".

The data are read in.

Depending on which data you have selected, ShopMill will behave as
follows:

All tool offset data

First all tool management data is deleted, then the backup data is read
in.

All tool offset data used in the program

If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool
management, you can choose from the following options.
Replace all # Press the "Replace all" soft key if you want to read in all tool data.
Any existing tools are overwritten without warning.

-or-

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-280 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.2 Manage programs with PCU 20

Replace # Press the "Replace none" soft key if you want to cancel the data
none
read in process.

-or-

# Press the "No" soft key if you want to retain the existing tool.

-or-

# Press the "Yes" soft key if you want to overwrite the existing tool.

With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old

tool is deleted; in the case of the "with loading/unloading" variant, the
old tool is unloaded beforehand.
If you change the tool name before pressing "Yes" to read in the data,
the tool is entered in the tool list as well.

Work offsets
Existing work offsets are always overwritten when data are read in.

Magazine assignments
If the magazine assignments are not read in with the other data, the
tools are entered without location number in the tool list.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-281
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

The ShopMill variant with PCU 50 has its own hard disk in addition to
the NC main memory. Therefore, any program that is not currently
needed in the NC can be stored on the hard disk.
In addition, you can display the directory structures of floppy disk
drives and network drives as well as read programs and data in/out via
an RS-232 interface.

ShopMill user interface PCU 50

RS-232
interface

edit edit edit

ShopMill programs ShopMill programs ShopMill programs

ShopMill subroutines ShopMill subroutines ShopMill subroutines
G code programs edit G code programs
load G code programs.

unload
Network drive Data manage-
ment list on save
Diskette drive hard disk NC main memory

Data management with PCU 50

The Program Manager provides an overview of all directories and

programs.

Program Manager PCU 50

In the horizontal soft key bar you can select the memory medium for
which you want to display directories and programs. In addition to the
"NC" soft key, via which the data in the NC main memory and the data
management directory on the hard disk can be displayed, soft keys 2

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-282 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

to 5 can also be assigned. You can use them to display the directories
and programs on the following data storage media:
• Network drives (network card required)
• Floppy disk drive
• Archive directory on the hard disk
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

In the overview, the symbols have the following meaning:

! Directory

"
Program

Zero point data/tool data

The directories and programs are always listed together with the
following information:
• Name
The name can consist of max. 24 characters. When the data is
transferred to external systems, the name is truncated after 8
characters.
• Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Zero point data/tool data: INI
• Loaded
You can tell by a cross in the "Loaded" column whether the
program is still contained in the NC main memory (X) or is
swapped out to your hard disk ( ).
• Size (in bytes)
• Date/time (of creation or last change)

ShopMill stores the programs that are created internally for calculating
the stock removal processes in the "TEMP" directory.

Information about memory allocation on the hard disk and in the NC is

displayed above the horizontal soft key bar.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-283
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

Open a directory

# Press the "Program Manager" key or "Program" soft key.

-or- The directory overview is displayed.

# Use the soft keys to select the memory medium.

...
# Position the cursor on the directory you want to open.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- All programs in this directory are now displayed.

Return to the higher

level directory
# Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor on any line.

-or-

# Position the cursor on the return jump line.

-and-

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

-or- The higher directory level is displayed.

6.3.1 Open program

If you want to look at a program in greater detail, or make changes to

it, display the program in the machining plan.

# Press the "Program" soft key.

The directory overview is displayed.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to open.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or-
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The
machining plan is displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-284 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3.2 Execute a program

You can select all programs that are saved on your system at any time
to use them for machining workpieces automatically.

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to execute.

Execute # Press soft key "Execute".

ShopMill switches to "Machine Auto" operating mode and uploads the

program.

# Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
Workpiece machining is initiated (see also Section "Automatic mode".)

If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press

the "Execute" soft key to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode.
You can start machining the workpiece there by pressing the "Cycle
Start" key.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-285
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3.3 Multiple clamping

The "Multiple clamping" function provides optimized tool change over

several workpiece clampings. Firstly this shortens the idle times.
Secondly, time is no longer lost for tool changes as - in so far as
possible - all machining of a workpiece in all clampings is performed
first before the next tool change is triggered.

You can use rotating clamping bridges in addition to flat clamping

bridges if supported by the machine manufacturer.
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

You can either execute the same program several times on the
different clampings or select different programs.

The "Multiple clamping for different programs" function is a software

option.

The multiple clamping function creates one single program from

several different programs. The tool sequence within a program
remains unchanged. Cycles and subroutines are not opened, position
patterns are processed as closed units.

The individual programs must meet the following requirements:

• ShopMill programs only

• Program must have been tested
• Program for the 1st clamping must have been trial run
• No markers/repetitions, i.e. no branches in the program
• No inch/metric switchover
• No work offsets
• No coordinate transformation (translation, scaling, etc.)
• Contours must have unique names, i.e. the same contour name
must not be called in several different programs
• The "Starting point" parameter must not be set to "manual" in the
stock removal cycle (contour milling).
• No modal settings, i.e. settings that are effective for all subsequent
program blocks (only with multiple clamping for different programs)
• Max. of 50 contours per clamping
• Max. of 99 clampings

You can substitute subroutines for the markers or repetitions which

may not be included in programs for multiple clampings.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-286 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

# Open the Program Manager.

Continue Multiple # Press the "Continue" and "Multiple clamping" soft keys.
> clamping
# Specify the number of clampings and the number of the first work
offset to be used.
The clampings are processed in ascending sequence from the
start work offset. The work offsets are defined in the "Tools/Work
Offsets" menu (see Section "Work offsets").

# Enter a name for the new, global program (XYZ.MPF).

OK
# Press soft key "OK".

A list is displayed in which the different programs must be assigned to

the work offsets. Not all work offsets, i.e. clampings, must be assigned
to programs, but at least two.

Program # Press the "Program selection" soft key.

selection
The program overview is displayed.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to execute.

OK
# Press soft key "OK".

The program is included in the assignment list.

# Repeat this process until a program is assigned to every required

work offset.

On all # If you wish to execute the same program on all clampings, select
clampings
soft key "On all clampings".
You can assign different programs to individual work offsets first,
and then assign one program to the remaining work offsets by
selecting soft key "On all clampings".

Delete Delete all # Press the "Delete selection" or "Delete all" soft key if you want to
selection
clear individual or all programs from the assignment list.

Calculate # Press the "Calculate program" soft key when the assignment list
program
ist complete.

This optimizes the tool changes.

The global program is then renumbered. The number of the current
clamping is specified every time the program switches from one
clamping to another.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-287
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

Apart from the global program (XYZ.MPF), the file XYZ_MCD.INI is

also set up in which the assignment between work offsets and
programs is stored. Both programs are stored in the directory that was
previously selected in the Program Manager.

If you switch from the assignment list (without "Abort" or "Create

program") to another function and then call the "Multiple clamping"
function later on, the same assignment list is displayed again.

6.3.4 Loading/unloading program

If you do not want to execute one or more programs in the foreseeable

future, you can unload them from the NC memory. The programs then
reside on the hard disk and the NC memory is released again.

As soon as you execute a program that was swapped out, it is

automatically swapped in to the NC memory.
You can, however, also load one or more ShopMill programs in the NC
main memory memory without executing them immediately.

Programs that are in "Machine Auto" mode cannot be swapped out

from the NC memory to the hard disk.
Unloading programs

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to unload from the
NC main memory.

Continue Unload # Press the "Continue" and "Unload manual" soft keys.
> manual
The selected program is no longer marked by an "X" in the "Loaded"
column.
The line indicating the available memory space shows that the NC
memory was freed again.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-288 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

Loading programs
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to load into the NC
main memory.

Continue Load # Press the "Continue" and "Load manual" soft keys.
> manual
The selected program is now marked by an "X" in the "Loaded"
column.

6.3.5 Execute G code program from hard disk, floppy disk drive or network drive

If your NC memory resources are low, you can also execute G code
programs from hard disk, floppy disk or network drive.
Then instead of loading the entire G code program into the NC
memory before execution, only the first part is loaded. While the first
part is being executed, subsequent program blocks are continuously
loaded.

With execution from hard disk, floppy disk drive or network drive, the
G code program remains stored on this drive.

You cannot execute ShopMill programs from hard disk or floppy

disk/network drive.

Execute G code program

from hard disk
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory in which you want to execute a

G code program from the hard disk.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- The program overview is displayed.

# Position the cursor on the G code program you want to execute

from the hard disk (without "X").

Continue Exec. from # Press the "Continue" and "Execution from hard disk" soft keys.
> hard disk
ShopMill switches to "Machine Auto" mode and uploads the G code
program.

# Press the " Start" key.

Cycle Start
Workpiece machining is initiated (see also Section "Automatic mode").
The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC main
memory while the program is being processed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-289
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

Execute G code program

from floppy disk/network
drive

# Open the Program Manager.

# Use the soft keys to select the floppy disk drive/network drive.
...
# Position the cursor on the directory in which you want to execute a
G code program.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- The directory is opened.

# Position the cursor on the G code program that you want to

execute.

Continue Exec. from # Press the "Continue" and "Execution from hard disk" soft keys.
> hard disk
ShopMill switches to "Machine Auto" mode and uploads the G code
program.

# Press the " Start" key.

Cycle Start
Workpiece machining is initiated (see also Section "Automatic mode").
The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC main
memory while the program is being processed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-290 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3.6 Create new directory/program

Directory structures facilitate administration of your programs and

data. You can create as many subdirectories as you want in one
directory.
You can also create programs in a subdirectory/directory and then
create program blocks for the program (see Section "Programming
with ShopMill").
The new program is automatically stored for you in the NC main
memory.

Create a directory

# Open the Program Manager.

New Directory # Press the "New" and "Directory" soft keys.

# Enter a new directory name.

# Press soft key "OK".

The new directory is created.

Create programs
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a

new program.

# Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or-
New # Press the "New" soft key.

ShopMill # Now press the "ShopMill program" soft key if you want to create a
program
ShopMill program.
(See Section "Programming with ShopMill")

-or-

G code # Press the "G code program" soft key if you want to create a G
program
code program.
(See Section "Programming with G code")

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-291
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3.7 Select several programs

In order to copy or delete several programs at once, you can select

multiple programs at once, block by block or individually.

Selecting several
programs block by block
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the first program you want to select.

Mark # Press the "Mark" soft key.

# Broaden your program selection by pressing the cursor up or

-or- down keys.

The entire program block is highlighted.

Selecting several
separate programs
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the first program you want to select.

# Press the "Select" soft key.

# Then move the cursor to the next program you want to select.
-or-
# Press the "Select" soft key again.

The separately selected programs are highlighted.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-292 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3.8 Copying/renaming/moving directories/programs

If you want to create a new directory or program that is to be similar to

an already existing one, you can save time by copying the old directory
or program and then modifying selected programs or program blocks
only.
You can also move directories or programs or rename them.
You can also use the copy, cut and insert capabilities for directories
and programs to exchange data with other ShopMill systems via
diskette or the network drive.

You cannot rename a program if it is loaded in the "Machine Auto"

operating mode at the same time.

Copying
directory/program
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory/program you want to copy.

Copy # Press the "Copy" soft key.

# Select the directory level where you want to insert the copy of your
directory/program.

Insert # Press the "Insert" soft key.

The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory

level. If there already is a directory/program with the same name in
this level, you are prompted whether you want to overwrite the
directory/program or insert it under another name.

# Press the "OK" soft key if you want to overwrite the

directory/program.

-or-

# Specify another name if you want to save the directory/program

under another name.

-and-

# Press soft key "OK".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-293
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

Renaming
directories/programs
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory/program you want to rename.

Rename # Press the "Rename" soft key.

# In the "To:" field, enter the new directory name or program name.
The name must be unique, i.e. you cannot have two directories or
programs with the same name.

# Press soft key "OK".

The directory/program is renamed.

Moving
directories/programs
# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory/program you want to move.

Cut # Press the "Cut" soft key.

The selected directory/program is cut out at this location and stored in

the clipboard.

# Select the directory level where you want to insert the

directory/program.

Insert # Press the "Insert" soft key.

The directory/program is moved to the selected directory level.

If there already is a directory/program with the same name in this
directory level, you are prompted whether you want to overwrite the
directory/program or insert it under another name.

# Press the "OK" soft key if you want to overwrite the

directory/program.

-or-

# Specify another name if you want to save the directory/program

under another name.

-and-

# Press soft key "OK".

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-294 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3.9 Deleting directories/programs

It is advisable to regularly delete programs or directories that you are

no longer using so that your data management remains clearly
structured.
Save this data on an external data storage medium if required (see
Section "Read program in/out via RS-232 interface").

Remember when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data, zero
point data and subdirectories contained in this directory are deleted
too.

If you want to release space in the NC memory, delete the contents of

the "TEMP" directory. ShopMill stores the programs that are created
internally for calculating the stock removal processes in this directory.

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the directory/program you want to delete.

Cut # Press the "Cut" soft key.

The selected directory or program is deleted.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-295
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3.10 Execute program via RS-232 interface

Programs can be exchanged with other ShopMill stations using an

external data storages system over the RS-232 interface.
In addition, you can use this procedure to swap out data you are not
currently using to free the NC memory or hard disk. When you want to
use these swapped out programs again, you can swap them in any
time.

When you read a program out from/in to ShopMill, all ShopMill

subroutines are transferred too.
You can also read in/out several programs in one operation.

The RS-232 interface on the controller and on the external data

storage system must be adapted to one another, i.e. you must make
the same settings for each RS-232 interface.

Make sure that you set the correct file format (binary/PC, punched
tape or punched tape/ISO format) when you read out a program.
Otherwise, the other station will not be able to interpret the program.

Read out program

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the program you want to read out.

Continue Read out # Select soft keys "Continue" and "Read out".
>
RS-232 # Press the "RS-232 settings" soft key if you want to set up the
settings
interface.

# Make your required settings.

# Press the "Back" soft key.

The interface settings are saved.

All files # Press the "All files" soft key if you want to read out all displayed
programs.

# Start the transfer on the other system.

Start # Press soft key "Start".

The selected program and all its ShopMill subroutines are read out.
The "Read out" window displays the name of the program being read
out and the number of transferred bytes.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-296 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

Stop # Press the "Stop" soft key if you want to cancel the data transfer.

# Then press the "Start" soft key again to resume the data transfer
operation.

Read in program
# Open the Program Manager.

Continue Read in # Select soft keys "Continue" and "Read in".

>
RS-232 # Press the "RS-232 settings" soft key if you want to set up the
settings
interface.

# Make your required settings.

# Press the "Back" soft key.

The interface settings are saved.

# On the other system, select the programs you want to read in.

# Start the transfer on the other system.

Start # Press soft key "Start".

The "Read in" window displays the name of the program being read in
and the number of transferred bytes. The program is stored in the
directory stated in the program header.

Stop # Press the "Stop" soft key if you want to cancel the data transfer.

# Then press the "Start" soft key again to resume the data transfer
operation.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-297
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

6.3.11 Display error log

If errors occur during data transfer via the RS-232 interface, ShopMill
records them in an error log.

# Open the Program Manager.

Continue # Press the "Continue" soft key.

>
Read out Read in # Press the "Read out" or "Read in" soft key.
-or-
Error log # Then press the "Error log" soft key.

The data transfer log is displayed.

6.3.12 Save/read in tool data/zero point data

You can also store tool data and zero point settings in addition to
programs.
You can use this function, for example, to save the tool and zero point
data for a specific ShopMill program. If you want to execute this
program again later, you can access these settings quickly.

In this way, you can easily enter tool data that you have determined
using an external tool presetting device into the toll management
system. See:
References: /FBSP/, Description of Functions ShopMill

You can choose which data you want to save:

• Tool data
• Magazine assignments
• Zero points
• Basic zero point

In addition you can determine the scope of the data backup:

• Full tool list/all zero points
• All tool data/zero points used in the program

You can only read out the magazine assignments if your system
provides support for loading and unloading tool data to and from the
tool-holding magazine (see Section "Loading/unloading tools").

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-298 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 6 6
11.02 File Management
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

Backing up data

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the program for which you want to back up
the tool and zero point data.

Continue Back up # Press the "Continue" and "Back up data" soft keys.
> data
# Select the data you want to back up.

# Change the suggested name if required.

The name suggested as the name for your tool and zero point file
is the name of the originally selected program with the extension
"..._TMZ".

# Press soft key "OK".

The tool/zero point data are saved in the same directory as the
selected program.
If your directory already contains a tool and zero point file with the
same file name, then they are overwritten with the new data.

Read in data

# Open the Program Manager.

# Position the cursor on the backed up tool/zero point data which

you want to read back in again.

Execute # Press the "Execute" soft key or the "Input" key.

-or- The "Read in backup data" window appears.

# Select which data (tool offset data, magazine assignments, zero

point data, basic work offset) you wish to read in.

# Press soft key "OK".

The data are read in.

Depending on which data you have selected, ShopMill will behave as
follows:

All tool offset data

First all tool management data is deleted, then the backup data is read
in.

All tool offset data used in the program

If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool
management, you can choose from the following options.
Replace all # Press the "Replace all" soft key if you want to read in all tool data.
Any existing tools are overwritten without warning.

-or-

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 6-299
 6 6
File Management 11.02
6.3 Manage programs with PCU 50

Replace # Press the "Replace none" soft key if you want to cancel the data
none
read in process.

-or-

# Press the "No" soft key if you want to retain the existing tool.

-or-

# Press the "Yes" soft key if you want to overwrite the existing tool.

With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old

tool is deleted; in the case of the "with loading/unloading" variant, the
old tool is unloaded beforehand.
If you change the tool name before pressing "Yes" to read in the data,
the tool is entered in the tool list as well.

Work offsets
Existing work offsets are always overwritten when data are read in.

Magazine assignments
If the magazine assignments are not read in with the other data, the
tools are entered without location number in the tool list.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

6-300 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages

Alarms and Messages

7.1 Cycle alarms and messages ................................................................................... 7-302

7.1.1 Error treatment in cycles ......................................................................................... 7-302
7.1.2 Cycle alarm overview .............................................................................................. 7-302
7.1.3 Messages in cycles ................................................................................................. 7-307

7.2 Alarms for ShopMill ................................................................................................. 7-308

7.2.1 Alarm overview........................................................................................................ 7-308
7.2.2 Select the alarm/message overview ....................................................................... 7-309
7.2.3 Description of alarms .............................................................................................. 7-310

7.3 User data................................................................................................................. 7-318

7.4 Version display ........................................................................................................ 7-320

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-301
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.1 Cycle alarms and messages

7.1 Cycle alarms and messages

7.1.1 Error treatment in cycles

If the system detects an error status while processing a cycle, it

generates an alarm and aborts cycle execution.
Alarms with numbers ranging from 61000 to 62999 are generated in
cycles.
The reset criteria for these number ranges are
• NC-RESET for 61000 ... 61999 and
• CANCEL for 62000 ... 62999
The error text that is simultaneously displayed with the alarm number
indicates the possible error cause.

7.1.2 Cycle alarm overview

The following table provides an overview of cycles that might be generated in

machining cycles and tips for remedying the underlying errors.

Alarm number Alarm text Explanation, remedy

61000 "No tool offset active" D offset must be programmed before cycle is
called
61001 "Thread pitch incorrectly defined" Check parameters for thread size and pitch
settings (for contradiction)
61002 "Machining type incorrectly The machining type parameter has been set to
defined" the wrong value and needs to be altered.
61003 "No feedrate programmed in cycle" The feedrate parameter has been set to the
wrong value and needs to be altered.
61006 "Tool radius too large" Select smaller tool
61007 "Tool radius too small" Select larger tool
61009 "Active tool number = 0" Load the required tool
61010 "Finishing allowance too large" Reduce the finishing allowance setting
61011 "Invalid scaling" The active scaling factor is not permissible for
this cycle.
61012 "Different scales in one plane" Cycle execution only possible with uniform
scaling in the plane
61013 "Basic settings have been altered, Check basic settings and alter them if
program cannot be executed" necessary
61101 "Reference plane incorrectly If you choose to program relative depth
defined" settings, you must select different values for the
reference and return planes. Alternatively, set
an absolute depth value

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-302 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.1 Cycle alarms and messages

61102 "No spindle direction programmed" A spindle direction must be programmed

61103 "Number of holes is zero" You have not programmed a value for the
number of holes
61104 "Contour violation of slots" Errors in parameterization of milling pattern in
those parameters which define the position of
slots on a circle and their shape
61105 "Cutter radius too large" The diameter of the selected cutting tool is too
large for the profile to be machined. You must
either use a tool with a smaller radius or modify
the contour
61106 "Number or spacing of circle Parameterization error, programmed circle
elements" elements cannot be arranged around a full
circle
61107 "First drilling depth incorrectly First drilling depth is inverted in relation to total
defined" drilling depth
61108 "No valid settings for parameters Parameters "Radius" and "Infeed depth per
_RAD1 and _DP1" revolution" must be taken into account for
insertion along helical path
61109 "Parameter _CDIR incorrectly Parameter defining milling direction is
defined" incorrectly defined
61110 "Finishing allowance on base > Alter setting for depth infeed if necessary
infeed depth"
61111 "Infeed width > tool diameter" The programmed infeed width is greater than
the diameter of the active tool. The infeed width
must be reduced.
61112 "Tool radius negative" The radius of the active tool is negative. This is
illegal.
61113 "Parameter _CRAD for corner Reduce the parameter for corner radius
radius too large"
61114 "Direction of machining G41/G42 Check the machining direction of tool radius
incorrectly defined" compensation left/right and alter
61115 "Approach or retract mode The contour approach and retract mode has
(line/circle/plane/ been incorrectly defined. Check parameters
space) incorrectly defined" "Approach/retract mode" and "Approach/retract
strategy".
61116 "Approach or retract path = 0" The approach or retract path is set to zero, it
must be increased.
61117 "Active tool radius <= 0" The radius of the active tool is negative or set to
zero. This is illegal.
61118 "Length or width = 0" The length or width of the milling surface is not
legal.
61119 "Nominal or core diameter Check thread geometry
incorrectly programmed"
61120 "Thread type internal, external not You must enter the internal, external thread
defined" type

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-303
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.1 Cycle alarms and messages

61121 "Number of teeth/cutting edge Enter the number of teeth/cutting edge for the
missing" active tool in the tool list
61122 "Safety clearance in the plane The safety clearance is negative or zero. This is
incorrectly defined" illegal.
61124 "Infeed width is not programmed" In active simulation without a tool, a value for
the infeed width must always be programmed.
61125 "Technology selection not defined Check the settings in machine data 9855 and
correctly in parameter _TECHNO" 9856.
61126 "Thread length too short" Check thread geometry.
61127 "Gear ratio of thread drilling axis Check the settings in machine data 31050 and
incorrectly defined (machine data)" 31060.
61128 "Insertion angle = 0 when inserting Use greater insertion angle.
with oscillation or helix"
61180 "No name assigned to swivel data Assign a unique name for the swivel data block.
block although machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
> 1"
61181 "NCK software version not high Upgrade the NCK software version.
enough (no TOOLCARRIER
functionality)"
61182 "Swiveling data block name Check the name of the swivel data block.
unknown"
61183 "Retraction mode GUD7 _TC_FR Check swivel cycle CYCLE800 start-up.
outside value range 0..2"
61184 "No solution possible with currently Check the angle entered for swivelling the
input angle values" machining plane.
61185 "No or incorrect (min > max) angle Check swivel cycle CYCLE800 start-up.
ranges declared for rotary axes"
61186 "Rotary axis vectors invalid" Check swivel cycle CYCLE800 start-up.
61188 "No axis name declared for 1st Check swivel cycle CYCLE800 start-up.
rotary axis -> check CYCLE800
start-up"
61200 "Too many elements in machining Edit machining block, delete elements if
block" necessary
61201 "Incorrect sequence in machining Sort the machining block sequence
block"
61202 "Not a technology cycle" Program technology block.
61203 "Not a position cycle" Program positioning block.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-304 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.1 Cycle alarms and messages

61204 "Unknown technology cycle" Delete technology block and program again.
61205 "Unknown position cycle" Delete positioning block and program again.
61210 "Block search element not found" Repeat block search.
61212 "Incorrect tool type" Select a new tool type
61213 "Circle radius too small" Enter a larger value for the circle radius
61214 "No pitch programmed" The pitch must be programmed
61215 "Blank dimension incorrectly Check dimensions of blank spigot. blank spigot
programmed" must be larger than the finished spigot.
61216 "Feed/tooth possible only for Alternatively, you can set another feed type
milling tools"
61217 "Cutting rate programmed for tool Enter a cutting rate setting
radius 0 "
61218 "Feed/tooth programmed, but Enter the number of teeth of the cutting tool in
number of teeth is zero" the "Tool list" menu
61222 "Plane infeed greater than tool Reduce the plane infeed.
diameter "
61223 "Approach path too small" Enter a larger value for the approach path
61224 "Retract path too small" Enter a larger value for the retract path
61225 "Swiveling data block unknown" An attempt has been made to access an
undefined swiveling data block.
61226 "Swivel head cannot be replaced" The parameter "Swivel data block change" is
set to "no". An attempt has still been made to
change the swivel head.
61230 "Tool probe diameter too small" The tool probe is not correctly calibrated.
61231 "ShopMill program cannot be The program must be simulated in ShopMill first
executed; not yet tested by or loaded to the "Machine Auto" mode of
ShopMill" ShopMill.
61232 "Magazine tool cannot be loaded" An attempt has been made to automatically
load a tool into a swivel head which can hold
only manual tools.
61234 "ShopMill subroutine cannot be The subroutine must be simulated in ShopMill
executed; not yet tested by first or loaded to the "Machine Auto" mode of
ShopMill" ShopMill.
61301 "Probe is not responding" • Check probe connections
• Set a longer measuring distance via MD
9752, 9753, 9754, 9755
• For edge measurements: Position probe
closer to edge
• Position approximately over center of
spigots/holes
• Check setting for spigot/hole diameter

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-305
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.1 Cycle alarms and messages

61302 "Probe collision" The probe has collided with an obstacle on its
positioning path.
• Check spigot diameter (it may be too small)
• Check measuring path (it may be too long)
61303 "Safe area exceeded" Result of spigot/hole diameter measurement
deviates significantly from specified value.
Check radius or diameter.
Check measuring location (e.g. for inaccuracies
caused by swarf)
61308 Check measuring path 2a Enter measuring path = 0
Check MD 9752, 9753, 9754, 9755
61309 Check probe type Probe type: 3D probe not active
61310 Scaling factor is active Scaling factor = scaling is active
61311 No D number is active No tool offset has been selected for the probe
(for workpiece measurements) or for the active
tool (for tool measurements).
61316 Center point and radius cannot be The system cannot calculate a circle from the
calculated measured points.
61332 Alter the tool tip position Tool tip is positioned below the probe surface
(e.g. with a setting ring gauge or cube)
61338 Positioning speed is zero Set corresponding feedrate (plane/infeed rate)
via MD 9757 or 9758
61605 "Contour incorrectly programmed" Check the contour.
61610 "No infeed depth programmed" The infeed depth must be programmed
62100 "No drilling cycle active" No modal drilling cycle has been called before
the drilling pattern cycle
62101 "Milling direction not correct - G3 Climb or conventional milling programmed, but
will be generated" the spindle was not rotating when the cycle was
called.
62103 "No finishing allowance Program finishing allowance.
programmed"
62180 "Set rotary axes ... " Prompt to position rotary axes manually.
62181 "Set rotary axis ... " Prompt to position rotary axis manually.
62182 "Attach inclinable head: ..." Prompt to attach inclinable head.
62183 "Remove inclinable head:..." Prompt to remove inclinable head.
62184 "Replace inclinable head:..." Prompt to replace inclinable head.
62185 "Angle adjusted to angular grid:..." Indication that the desired angle cannot be set
due to the Hirth tooth system. The displayed
angle is set instead.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-306 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.1 Cycle alarms and messages

7.1.3 Messages in cycles

Cycles display messages in the dialog line of the control system.

Messages of this type do not interrupt the machining process.
Messages describe certain operational characteristics of the relevant
cycle and indicate the current processing status. They are generally
displayed for one processing section or until the cycle end.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-307
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

7.2.1 Alarm overview

If errors are detected in ShopMill, the system generates an alarm and

aborts program execution if necessary.
The error text that is simultaneously displayed with the alarm number
indicates the possible error cause.

Overview of alarms 100000-100999 Basic system

101000-101999 Diagnostics
102000-102999 Services
103000-103999 Machine
104000-104999 Parameters
105000-105999 Programming
106000-106999 Spare
107000-107999 OEM
110000-110999 Reserved
111000-112999 ShopMill
120000-120999 Reserved

Danger

Please check the plant situation as indicated in the description of the

alarm/s that has/have been generated. Eliminate the cause of the
alarm/s and acknowledge it/them as instructed. If you fail to observe
this alarm response procedure, you will endanger the machine,
workpiece, stored settings and possibly your own safety.

If you are working in CNC ISO mode, please refer to alarm

descriptions in the following manual:
References: /DA/, Diagnostics Guide SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-308 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

7.2.2 Select the alarm/message overview

Function

You can view alarms and messages and then acknowledge them.

Operating sequence

The alarm/message overview displays all active alarms and messages

or with numbers, date, cancel criterion and explanation.
Cancel the alarm with the key displayed in symbol form:

Switch machine/control off and on again (main switch)

or NCK Power ON
Press the "Reset key"
Reset

Press the "Alarm cancel" key

Alarm is canceled with "Cycle Start"

Cycle Start

Alarm is canceled with the "Return" key

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-309
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

7.2.3 Description of alarms

111 311 NC Start is not possible: Deselect SBL mode

Explanation You have activated a program with block search even though SBL
mode was active at the same time.
Reaction NC Start disable
Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Deselect SBL mode

112 045 More insertion points required

Explanation The system requires more insertion points to machine the contour
pocket.
The machining process is divided into several individual operations.
Residual material will be left on the workpiece.
Reaction Alarm display
This alarm is a warning only.
The program can be started.
Remedy If you use a smaller cutter, you may be able to perform the operation
with a single insertion point.

112 046 Main contour cannot be traversed

Explanation The pocket contour cannot be traversed with the programmed cutting
tool.
Residual material will be left on the workpiece.
Reaction Alarm display
This alarm is a warning only.
The program can be started.
Remedy You may be able to traverse the whole pocket contour if you use a
smaller cutter.

112 052 No residual material generated

Explanation No residual material has been generated.
You may not need to remove any residual material.
Reaction Alarm display
This alarm is a warning only.
The program can be started.
Remedy No remedial action necessary.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-310 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

112 057 Programmed helix violates contour

Explanation You have selected the starting point for helical insertion such that the
programmed contour is violated by the helix.
Reaction Alarm display
This alarm is a warning only.
The program can be started.
Remedy Select another starting point.
Use a smaller helix radius.

112 099 System error contour pocket

Explanation An error has occurred during calculation of the contour pocket.
Reaction Alarm display
The system cannot calculate the contour pocket.
The program cannot be started.
Remedy Please note the error text and contact the Siemens A&D MC Hotline.

112 100 Renumbering error.

Initial state restored
Explanation You have selected soft key "Renumber" in the program editor. An
error has occurred during renumbering which has damaged the
program in the memory. The original program must now be reloaded
to the memory.
Reaction Alarm display
Program has not been renumbered.
Remedy Create space in the memory, e.g. by deleting an old program. Select
"Renumber" soft key again.

112 200 Contour is Step in current program sequence. Processing not

enabled
Explanation The selected contour is an element of the program loaded under
"Program".
Reaction Alarm display
The contour is an element from a loaded program and cannot be
deleted or renamed.
Remedy Remove contour from the loaded program.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-311
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

112 201 Contour is step in current Automatic sequence. Processing not

enabled
Explanation The selected contour is an element of the program loaded under
"Machine Auto".
Reaction Alarm display
The contour is an element of a program loaded under "Machine Auto"
and cannot be deleted or renamed. After program start, contours
included in the current program cannot be altered under "Program"
while the program is running.
Remedy Stop program run and load program under "Program". Delete contour
from program.

112 210 Tool axis cannot be reselected. Insufficient NC memory.

Explanation If you select another tool axis, you must generate a new NC program.
You must save the old NC program first and then generate the new
one. There is not sufficient NC memory available at this point to store
the new program.
Reaction Alarm display
The new tool axis is not selected.
Remedy You must create free space in the NC memory corresponding to at
least the space required by the new program (e.g. by deleting
programs you no longer need).

112 211 System unable to process tool preselection. Insufficient NC

memory.
Explanation Before a tool preselection can be processed, you must generate a
new NC program. You must save the old NC program first and then
generate the new one. There is not sufficient NC memory available at
this point to store the new program.
Reaction Alarm display
The system does not process the tool preselection.
Remedy You must create free space in the NC memory corresponding to at
least the space required by the new program (e.g. by deleting
programs you no longer need).

112 300 Tool management strategy 2 impossible.

Magazine is not fully loaded
Explanation The magazine is not fully loaded with tools. The number of tools
defined in machine data 18082 must be set up in the magazine for tool
management strategy 2.
Reaction Power ON alarm
Remedy Start-up: Set up the correct number of tools

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-312 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

112 301 Tool management strategy 2 impossible.

Magazine is not sorted according to tool list
Explanation The magazine list is not sorted in the same way as the tool list. The
tool order in the magazine for tool management strategy 2 must be
defined according to their T numbers.
Reaction Power ON alarm
Remedy Start-up: Define tools according to their T numbers in magazine
locations

112 323 Remove inclinable head

Explanation You are requested to remove the specified inclinable head from the
spindle.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Remedy Remove inclinable head.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

112 324 Attach inclinable head

Explanation You are requested to mount the specified inclinable head in the
spindle.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Remedy Mount inclinable head.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

112 325 Replace inclinable head

Explanation You are requested to replace the specified inclinable head in the
spindle with a new inclinable head.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Remedy Replace inclinable head

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

112 326 Set inclinable head

Explanation You are requested to set the inclinable head according to the specified
data.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Remedy Set inclinable head.

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-313
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

112 327 Angle outside the permissible range

Explanation The programmed machining operation cannot be performed with the
inclinable head.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Press NC Start.
Clamp the workpiece differently if appropriate.

112 328 Angle adjusted to angular grid

Explanation Owing to the angular grid, the inclinable head cannot be set to exactly
the specified angle.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy The machining operation can continue with the set values, but will not
match the programmed machining values exactly.

112 329 Set swivel head/table

Explanation You are requested to set the swivel head/table according to the
specified data.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Remedy Set swivel head/table

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

112 330 Set swivel table

Explanation You are requested to set the swivel table according to the specified
data.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Remedy Set swivel table

Please read the machine manufacturer's instructions.

112 350 No swiveling data available

Explanation No swiveling data sets are available.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Set up the necessary swiveling data sets
(see /FBSP/, ShopMill Description of Functions)

112 360 Step not entered in program chain, since program execution is
active
Explanation The program that you want to modify is currently running in "Machine
Auto" mode. You can only modify programs if they are not being
machined in the "Machine Auto" operating mode at the same time.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Terminate program in "Machine Auto" mode.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-314 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

112 400 Not available in the tool management

Explanation The tool stipulated in the program does not exist.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy You must create the tool before saving the data.

112 401 Tool setup has failed

Explanation The system was unable to set up a tool as the tool data were being
read in.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Check tool management.

112 420 Error in inch/metric system switchover! Check all data!

Explanation Not all data have been converted for the inch/metric switchover.
Reaction Alarm display
NC Start disable
Remedy Check the following data:
• Display machine data:
MD9655: $MM_CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST
MD9656: $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST
MD9658: $MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_COUNT_PO_TO_RAD
MD9664: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN
MD9665: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT
MD9666: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH
MD9670: $MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKET
MD9752: $MM_CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE
MD9753: $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN
MD9754: $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH
MD9755: $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS
MD9756: $MM_CMM_MEASURING_FEED
MD9757: $MM_CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL
MD9758: $MM_CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL
MD9759: $MM_CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP
MD9761: $MM_CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP
MD9762: $MM_CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP
MD9765: $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEAS
MD9766: $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS
MD9767: $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS
MD10240: $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC
MD20150 [12]: $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
• Tool data for various cutting edges D::
Length Z, radius R,
wear lengths Z and R
• Work offsets:
Basic offset
Position in X, Y, Z and A, C (if configured)
Work offset
• Settings in MANUAL operating mode:
Return plane
Safety clearance

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-315
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

Note This alarm can occur only in connection with hardware defects.

112 502 Insufficient memory

Abort in line %1
Explanation %1 = line number
Program contains too many program blocks
Reaction Alarm display
Program is not loaded
Remedy Modify program in operating area PROGRAMS CNC-ISO operator
interface.

112 504 File does not exist or is faulty: %1

Explanation %1 = Name of file/contour
Program cannot interpret a program block containing contour
programming. Contour does not exist in directory.
Reaction Alarm display
NC Start disable
Remedy Load contour to directory.

112 505 Error in interpreting contour %1

Explanation %1 = Name of contour
Contour is faulty
Reaction Alarm display
NC Start disable
Remedy Check contour machining sequence

112 506 Maximum number of contour elements exceeded %1

Explanation %1 = Name of contour
The maximum permissible number of contour elements (50) has been
exceeded during interpretation of the contour machining sequence.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Check contour machining sequence, revise if necessary.

112 541 Program cannot be interpreted

Explanation The program cannot be interpreted as a ShopMill program during
loading as the program header is missing.
Reaction Alarm display
NC Start disable
Remedy -

112 604 Link to PLC interrupted

Explanation Checkback message to the PLC user program that the link to the PCU
is interrupted.
Reaction Alarm display
ShopMill PLC is shut down
Remedy Check the PLC user program.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-316 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

112 605 Asynchronous subroutine has not been executed

Note The NC has not been able to process the input values correctly.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Press NC Start.

112 650 Unknown PLC error

Explanation The PLC has signaled an error which cannot be recognized by the
operator interface.
Reaction Alarm display
NC Start disable
Remedy Press Power ON, contact Siemens.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-317
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.3 User data

7.3 User data

User data are variables that are used internally both by ShopMill
programs and G code programs. These user data can be displayed in
a list.

The following variables are defined:

• Global user data (GUD)
GUDs are valid in all programs.
GUD display can be disabled via the keyswitch or by using a
password.

• Local user data (LUD)

LUDs are only valid in the program or subroutine in which they
were defined.
ShopMill only shows the LUDs that are available in the execution
sequence of the controller. If you press the "Cycle Stop" key, the
list of LUDs is updated. The values, on the other hand, are updated
continuously.

• Program global user data (PUD)

PUDs are generated from the local variables (LUD) defined in the
main program.
This means that the PUDs are valid in all subroutines and can be
written and read there.
Local user data are also displayed with the program global user
data.

• Channel-specific user data

The channel-specific user data are only valid in one channel.

ShopMill does not display user data of type AXIS and FRAME.

For details of which variables ShopMill displays, please refer to the

machine manufacturer's instruction manual.

Display user data

! Press the "Tools WOs" or the "Offset" key.

-or-
! Press the "Expansion" soft key.

! Press the "User data" soft key.

Global Program ! Use the soft keys to select which user data you want to display.
user data ... user data

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-318 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 7 7
11.02 Alarms and Messages
7.3 User data

GUD + GUD – ! Press the "GUD +" or "GUD -" soft key if you want to display GUD
or 1 to GUD 9 of the global and channel-specific user data.

Find user data

Search
! Select soft key "Search".

! Specify the text you want to search for.

You can search for any string of characters.

! Press the "Accept" soft key.

The user data you are looking for is displayed.

Continue ! Press the "Continue search" soft key if you want to continue the
search
search.

The next user data with the specified character string is displayed.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 7-319
 7 7
Alarms and Messages 11.02
7.4 Version display

7.4 Version display

The ShopMill and NCU versions are given in the CNC-ISO operator
interface.
The ShopMill-PLC version is given in the ShopMill Start Display.

! Switch to the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Diagnostics Service ! Press the "Diagnostics" and "Service display" soft keys.
display

Version NCU ! Press the "Version" and "NCU version" soft keys.
version
The NCU Version is shown at the top of the window that appears:
xx.yy.zz 810D or 840D

MMC ! Press the "MMC Version" soft key.

version
The ShopMill Version is given in the list that appears.
PCU 50: ShopMill............ V xx.yy.zz
PCU 20: cmm.dll............. V xx.yy.zz

"

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

7-320 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples

Examples

8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot ........................... 8-322

8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour .................................................................... 8-330

8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot ................................................................... 8-333

8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation ........................................................... 8-336

8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation ........................................................................ 8-340

8.6 Example 6: Swiveling .............................................................................................. 8-344

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-321
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

Workpiece drawing

0
20 -4
-6
-10
4

R1 0 85
0

155 10
R1 R15
0 16
30
135
R25
R4
0 o
115 20
R20 180
10
Depth -3
30 o 95

R1
70 0
35 R28
R5 40
o
15
60
20

15

25
15
15 Starting point
+Y
0
0
+X
0
15 25 90 155 165
180

Program part_4

1. Program header • Define a blank:

X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 0 abs
X1 180abs Y1 180abs Z1-20abs

• Select soft key

2. Face milling Face

• Select via soft keys milling > and choose a machining
strategy
• Example of technological data:
T FACING TOOL F 0.1mm/tooth V 1200 m/min
Machining Roughing
X0 0 abs
Y0 0 abs
Z0 1 abs
X1 180 abs
Y1 180 abs

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-322 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

Z1 0 abs
DXY 80%
DZ 0.5
UZ 0

• Select soft key

3. Outside contour of The outside contour can be defined as a rectangular spigot as shown
workpiece here. It is of course also possible to use the contour milling function.

Spigot Rectangular
• Select via soft keys > spigot

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly and enter

the following parameters:

Position of Bottom left

reference point
Machining
Position type Single position
X0 0 abs
Y0 0 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 180 abs
L 180 abs
R 10 abs
α0 0 degrees
Z1 20 inc
DZ 20
UXY 0
UZ 0
W1 185 (fictitious blank dimension)
L1 185 (fictitious blank dimension)

• Select soft key

4. Outside contour of island In order to machine the entire surface outside the island, define a
contour pocket around the blank and then program the island. In this
way, the entire surface area is machined and no residual material is
left behind.

a) Outside contour of pocket New

• Select via soft keys contour >

• Enter a contour name (in this case: Part_4_Pocket) and confirm

• Fill in start screenform for contour

Tool axis Z
X –20 abs Y 0 abs

and confirm .

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with soft

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-323
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

key :

1. X 200 abs

2. Y 200 abs

3. X –20 abs
Close
4. contour

• Select soft key

a) Outside contour of island New
• Select via soft keys contour >

• Enter a contour name (in this case: Part_4_Island) and confirm

• Fill in start screenform for contour

Tool axis Z
X 90 abs Y 25 abs

and confirm .

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with soft

key :

1. X 25 abs FS 15

2. Y 115 abs R 20

3. X 15 abs Y 135 abs

4. Y 155 abs R 10

5. X 60 abs R 15

6. Y 135 abs R 20
Tangent
7. to prec. Direction of rotation
R 25 X 110 abs
Tangent
8. to prec.

Y 155abs R 15

9. R 0

10. X 165 abs Y 95 abs α 1 290 degrees R 0

11. X 155 abs α 1 240 degrees R 28

12. FS 0

13. X 140 abs Y 25 abs α 1 225 degrees R 0

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-324 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

Close
14. contour

c) Mill/solid machine a contour Remove

• Select via soft keys >

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly

(e.g. cutter diameter 10) and enter the following parameters:

Machining
Z0 0 abs
Z1 10 inc
DXY 4.5mm
DZ 10
UXY 0mm
UZ 0
Starting point auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.1mm/tooth
Select lift-off mode, e.g. to retraction plane

•
Notes:
• When selecting the milling tool, please make sure that the tool
diameter is large enough to cut the intended pocket. A message
will be output if you make a mistake.
• If you want to finish cut the pocket, you must assign parameters
UXY and UZ accordingly and add a second solid machining cycle
for finishing.

5. Mill a rectangular pocket Pocket Rectangular

(large) • Select via soft keys > pocket

• Example of technological data:

T MILLTOOL10 F 0.1mm/tooth V 200m/min

Position of Center
reference point
Machining
Position type Single position
X0 90 abs
Y0 60 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 40
L 70
R 10
α0 15
Z1 4 inc
DXY 4.5mm
DZ 4
UXY 0

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-325
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

UZ 0
Insertion Helical
EP 2
ER 2
Stock removal Complete machining

•
6. Mill a rectangular pocket Pocket Rectangular
(small) • Select via soft keys > pocket

• Enter parameters:

X0 90 abs
Y0 60 abs
Z0 –4 abs
W 20
L 35
R 5
α0 15
Z1 4 inc
DXY 4.5mm
DZ 2
UXY 0
UZ 0
Insertion Oscillation
EW 10 degrees
Stock removal Complete machining

•
7. Mill a circumferential slot Groove Circumf.
• Select via soft keys > groove

• Example of technological data:

T MILLTOOL8 F 0.5mm/tooth FZ 0.02mm/tooth
V 150m/min

Machining
Full/pitch circle Pitch circle
X0 85 abs
Y0 135 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 10
R 40
α0 180 degrees
α1 180 degrees
α2 0 degrees
N 1
Z1 3 inc

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-326 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

DZ 3
UXY 0mm

•
8. Drilling/centering Center-
• Select via soft keys ing >

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly and enter

the following parameters:

Diameter/tip Diameter
∅ 16

•
9. Drilling/reaming Drilling Drilling
• Select via soft keys Reaming >

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly

(e.g. DRILL10) and enter the following parameters:

Diameter/tip Tip
Z1 –25 abs
DT 0

•
10. Positions Positions
• Select via soft keys >

• Enter parameters:

rectangular
Z0 –10 abs
X0 15 abs
Y0 15 abs
X1 165 abs
Y1 15 abs

•
11. Obstacle Positions Obstacle
• Select via soft keys >

• Enter parameters:

Z 2 abs

•
Note:
If this obstacle cycle is not inserted, the drill will violate the right-hand
corner of the island contour. Alternatively, you could increase the
safety clearance.

12. Positions Positions

• Select via soft keys >

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-327
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

• Enter parameters:

rectangular
Z0 –10 abs
X2 165 abs
Y2 165 abs
X3 15 abs
Y3 165 abs

•
13. Mill a circular pocket Pocket Circular
• Select via soft keys > pocket

• Example of technological data:

T MILLTOOL8 F 0.15mm/tooth V 300m/min

• Enter parameters:

Machining
Position type Single position
X0 85 abs
Y0 135 abs
Z0 –6 abs
Diameter 30
Z1 15 inc
DXY 4
DZ 5
UXY 0mm
UZ 0
Insertion Center
FZ 0.1mm/tooth
Stock removal Complete machining

Result • Programming graphic

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-328 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

• ShopMill program representation

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-329
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour

8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour

Workshop drawing
Y+ Y+

60
40

R3
Z+
10

10 50 X+ 10
30
120

In this example, the displayed shapes occur several times in the same
program. Mirroring is to be carried out in addition to the shifting
operation. The shapes are to be machined with a stock removal cycle.

Program Part_1

1. Program header • Define a blank:

Corner point: X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 2 abs
Dimensions: L 120 W 60 H -30

• Select soft key

2. Set start marker for Set

repetition of the contour • Select via soft keys marker >

• Set start marking with "Marker1"

•
3. Define the contour New
• Select via soft keys contour >

• Enter a contour name (in this case: PART_1_3COR) and confirm

• Fill in start screenform for contour

Tool axis Z
X 10 abs Y 10 abs

and confirm .

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with soft

key :

1. X 60 abs R 3

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-330 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour

2. X 10 abs Y 40 abs R 3

3. X 10 abs Y 10 abs R 3

• Select soft key

4. Solid machining Stock

• Select via soft keys removal >

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly

(e.g. cutter diameter 3) and enter the following parameters:

Machining
Z0 0 abs
Z1 10 inc
DXY 1.5mm
DZ 2
UXY 0.5
UZ 0.5
Starting point auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.1mm/tooth
Select lift-off mode, e.g. to retraction plane

•
5. Set end marker for contour Set
repetition • Select via soft keys marker >

• Set end marking with "Marker2"

•
6. Offset Transfor- Offset
• Select via soft keys mations > >

• Set the following parameters:

New/additive New
X 120
Y 60
Z 0

•
7. Mirroring Transfor- Mirror-
• Select via soft keys mations > ing >

• Set the following parameters:

New/additive add
X On
Y On
Z Off

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-331
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour

•
8. Repetition of contour Repetition
• Select via soft keys >

• Set the following markers:

Start marker Marker 1

End marker Marker 2
Number of 1
repetitions

•
Result • Programming graphic

• ShopMill program representation

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-332 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot

8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot

Workshop drawing
Tool,
e.g. centering tool

2x45o

90o

25
50
Z-

Y+ 100

100
80

X+

In this example, a circular spigot with chamfer (2mmx45°) is machined

on a blank with a pre-machined circular spigot using a centering tool.

The general tool requirements for machining a chamfer are as follows:

• Tool diameter = 0 (e.g. centering tool)

• Tool cutting edge angle = 90°

Determining UXY and Z1:

Z1 (inc) = UXY + chamfer

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-333
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot

Tool,
e.g. centering
tool

Plane Z0=0
of the spigot 2x45o 90o 3mm = Z1

2mm chamfer

UXY=1mm allowance
for

Program Part_3

1. Program header • Define a blank:

X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 0 abs
X1 100abs Y1 100abs Z1 –50abs

• Select soft key

2. Circular spigot Spigot Circular

• Select via soft keys > spigot

• Example of technological data:

T MILLTOOL40 F 2000mm/min V 200m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Machining
Position type Single position
X0 50 abs
Y0 50 abs
Z0 0 abs
∅ 80
Z1 25 inc
DZ 5
UXY 0mm
UZ 0.5
∅1 100

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-334 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot

3. Circular spigot Spigot Circular

• Select via soft keys > spigot

• Example of technological data:

T CENTERER F 2000mm/min S 200rev/min

• Set the following parameters:

Machining
Position type Single position
X0 50 abs
Y0 50 abs
Z0 0 abs
∅ 80
Z1 3 inc
DZ 10
UXY 1mm
UZ 0
∅1 100

•
Result • Programming graphic

• ShopMill program representation

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-335
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation

8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation

360o

90° Z

90o

Y
30°
o80mm
10°

30 o
Y
10 o
X 0o
-100 -60 -45 0

Preconditions • There is a rotary axis, e.g. axis A, and the transformation is

configured via machine data.
• The reference points on the cylinder are predefined.
Program the reference points X0, Y0, Z0 and the required work
offset, for example, in "Machine Manual", "Workpiece zero" and
"Edge". The work offset calculated from these is entered in the
work offset list.

Program

1. Program header • The blank dimensions correspond to the developed cylinder

peripheral surface (L= ∅ x π).
Define a blank:
X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 40 abs
X1 –100abs Y1 251.327abs Z1 20abs RP 50
Note: Y1 is calculated from diameter 80 multiplied by π (3,14...)

• Select soft key

2. Activate the work offset in Select work offset for cylinder surface transformation (e.g. offset the
the program zero point on the center point of the cylinder end face).
Transfor- Work
• Select via soft keys mations > offset >

• Select the required work offset and then select soft key .

3. Position the Y axis Position the tool in the Y axis over the center of the cylinder since the
Y axis is not traversed after cylinder transformation is selected.
Straight
• Select via soft keys line

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-336 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation

• Enter parameters:
X 10 abs Y 0 abs Z 50 abs A 0 abs
F *rapid traverse* mm/min radius compensation Off

• Select soft key

4. Activate cylinder peripheral Transfor- Cylinder
surface transformation • Select via soft keys mations > surface >

• Enter parameters:
Transformation On
∅ 80
Slot side comp. OFF

• Select soft key

5. Activate the work offset in Define the work offset for the machining operation on the developed
the program cylinder surface.
Transfor- Work
• Select via soft keys mations > offset >

• Select the required work offset and then select soft key .
6. Enter contour with contour New
calculator • Select via soft keys contour >

• Enter contour name and confirm

• Fill in the contour start screen

Tool axis Z
Cylinder surface yes
∅ 80
X 0 α 10abs
Yα
α value (in this case 10°).
Note: Delete Y value, then enter Yα

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with soft

key :

1. X -60 abs

2. α 90abs
Yα

3. X -45 abs

4. α 30abs
Yα

5. X 0 abs

• Select soft key

7. Path milling Path

• Select via soft keys milling

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-337
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation

• Enter parameters
T CUTTER8 F 0.2mm/tooth S 5000rev/min

Radius compensation Machining

Z0 40abs Z1 10inc DZ 10
UZ 0
UXY 0
Approach Linear
Depth infeed
L1 2
FZ 0,1mm/tooth
Retract Linear
Retract strategy
L2 2
Liftoff mode to return plane

Select soft key

8. Deactivate cylinder Transfor- Cylinder
peripheral surface • Select via soft keys mations > surface >

transformation • Enter parameters:

Transformation OFF

• Select soft key

9. Result • Programming graphic

• ShopMill program representation

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-338 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-339
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation

8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation

A slot with parallel slot sides is milled in a pipe. In this instance, it is

not the slot contour which is programmed, but the imaginary center-
point path of a bolt inserted in the slot.

50

x
35 o

45 o
12

25 15
15 100

o
35

50

Preconditions • There is a rotary axis, e.g. axis A, and the transformation is

configured via machine data.
• The reference points on the cylinder are predefined.
Program the reference points X0, Y0, Z0 and the required work
offset, for example, in "Machine Manual", "Workpiece zero" and

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-340 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation

"Edge". The work offset calculated from these is entered in the

work offset list.

Program

1. Program header • The blank dimensions correspond to the developed cylinder

peripheral surface.
X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 25 abs
X1 –130 abs Y1 157,08 abs Z1 22 abs
RP 50 SC 1
Note: Y1 is calculated according to equation: Y1 = ∅ π
In this case: Diameter 50 multiplied by 3.14...

• Select soft key

2. Activate the work offset in Select work offset for cylinder surface transformation (e.g. offset the
the program zero point on the center point of the cylinder end face).
Transfor- Work
• Select via soft keys mations > offset >

• Select the required work offset and then select soft key .

3. Position the Y axis Position the tool in the Y axis over the center of the cylinder since the
Y axis is not traversed after cylinder transformation is selected.
Straight
• Select via soft keys Line

• Enter parameters:
X 10abs Y 0abs Z 40abs
F *rapid traverse*mm/min radius compensation OFF

• Select soft key

4. Activate cylinder peripheral Transfor- Cylinder

surface transformation • Select via soft keys mations > surface >

• Enter parameters:
Transformation On
∅ 50
Slot side comp. On
D 6
Note: D is the distance from the imaginary center-point path to the
slot wall.

• Select soft key

5. Activate the work offset in Define the work offset for the machining operation on the developed
the program cylinder surface (shift zero point to the zero point on the workpiece
drawing).

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-341
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation

Transfor- Move zero

• Select via soft keys mations > point >

Select the required work offset and then select soft key .

6. Enter contour with contour New

calculator • Select via soft keys contour >

• Enter a contour name (in this case: cylinder) and confirm

• Fill in the contour start screen

Tool axis Z
Cylinder surface yes
∅ 50 X -25 abs α 0 abs
Yα
α value (in this case 0°).
Note: Delete Y value, then enter Yα

• Select soft key

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with soft

key :

1. X –44 abs

2. X –25 abs
All
3. parameters α -35 abs
Yα I 0 inc
Select Accept
dialog (α2 tang.) dialog β2 180°

4. X –94 abs

5.
6. X -6 abs α 0 abs
Yα α 1 45°

7. X –25 abs

• Accept contour by selecting soft key .

7. Path milling Path

• Select via soft keys milling

• Enter parameters
T CUTTER_8 F 0.2mm/tooth S 5000 rev/min

Radius compensation Machining

Z0 25 abs Z1 3 inc DZ 2
UZ 0 UXY 0

Approach Quadrant
R1 1
FZ 0.1mm/tooth

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-342 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation

Retract Quadrant
R2 1
Liftoff mode to return plane

• Select soft key

8. Deactivate cylinder Transfor- Cylinder

peripheral surface • Select via soft keys mations > surface >

transformation • Enter parameters:

Transformation OFF

• Select soft key

9. Result • Programming graphic

• ShopMill program representation

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-343
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

25 25

25

25
10

10
45°
20

20
50
R2 R2
10 in
10 in depth 45°
depth

Front view View of left-hand side

50
25
25
10

20

10 in
50

depth R2
45°
Z
Y X

Plan view
A 14
.4 34

17.678
10.206

10 in
depth
54.736°
90°
20.413
5
R

View A

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-344 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

In this example, the machining plane is swiveled several times.

Program example 4

1. Program header • Define a blank:

X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 0 abs
X1 –50abs Y1 –50abs Z1 –50abs

• Select soft key

2. Rectangular pocket Pocket Rectang.

• Select via soft keys > pocket

• Example of technological data:

T CUTTER_4 D 1 F 0.1mm/tooth V 200 m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Position of Center
reference point
Machining type Roughing
Position type Single position
X0 –25 abs
Y0 –25 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 10
L 20
R 2
α0 –45°
Z1 5 inc
DXY 3mm
DZ 2.5
UXY 0mm
UZ 0
Insertion Center
FZ 0.05mm/tooth
Stock removal Complete mach.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-345
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

3. Swiveling Transfor- Swiveling

• Select via soft keys mations > >

• Example of technological data:

T CUTTER_4 D 1

• Set the following parameters:

Retraction Yes
Swiveling Yes
Transformation New
X0 0
Y0 –50
Z0 0
Swiveling Axial
X 90°
Y 0°
Z 0°
X1 0
Y1 0
Z1 0
Direction -

•
4. Rectangular pocket Pocket Rectang.
• Select via soft keys > pocket

• Example of technological data:

T CUTTER_4 D 1 F 0.1mm/tooth V 200 m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Position of ref. point Center

Machining type Roughing
Position type Single position
X0 –25 abs
Y0 –25 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 10
L 20
R 2
α0 45°
Z1 5 inc
DXY 3mm
DZ 2.5
UXY 0mm
UZ 0
Insertion Center
FZ 0.05mm/tooth
Stock removal Complete mach.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-346 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

•
5. Swiveling Transfor- Swiveling
• Select via soft keys mations > >

• Example of technological data:

T CUTTER_4 D 1

• Set the following parameters:

Retraction Yes
Swiveling Yes
Transformation New
X0 –50
Y0 –50
Z0 0
Swiveling Axial
Z –90°
X 90°
Y 0°
X1 0
Y1 0
Z1 0
Direction -

•
6. Rectangular pocket Pocket Rectang.
• Select via soft keys > pocket

• Example of technological data:

T CUTTER_4 D 1 F 0.1mm/tooth V 200 m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Position of ref. point Center

Machining type Roughing
Position type Single position
X0 –25 abs
Y0 –25 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 10
L 20
R 2
α0 –45°
Z1 5 inc
DXY 3mm
DZ 2.5
UXY 0mm
UZ 0
Insertion Center
FZ 0.05mm/tooth

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-347
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

Stock removal Complete mach.

•
7. Setting Define a different blank so that the simulation in the visible section
displays the machining of the inclined plane:
Settings
• Select via soft keys

• Define a blank:
X0 -17.678 abs Y0 10.206 abs Z0 0 abs
X1 17.678 abs Y1 -20.413 abs Z1 –10 abs

• Select soft key

•
8. Swiveling Transfor- Swiveling
• Select via soft keys mations >

• Example of technological data:

T FACING TOOL D 1

• Set the following parameters:

Retraction Yes
Swiveling Yes
Transformation New
X0 –50
Y0 –50
Z0 –25
Swiveling Axial
Z –45°
X 54.736°
Y 0°
X1 0
Y1 20.413
Z1 0
Direction -

•
9. Face milling Face
• Select via soft keys milling > and choose a machining
strategy
• Example of technological data:
T FACING TOOL D 1 F 0.1mm/tooth V 200 m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Machining type Roughing

X0 –17.678 abs
Y0 –20.413 abs
Z0 14.434 abs

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-348 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 8 8
11.02 Examples
8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

X1 17.678 abs
Y1 10.206 abs
Z1 0 abs
DXY 80%
DZ 2.5
UZ 0

•
10. Drilling Drilling Drilling
• Select via soft keys Reaming >

• Example of technological data:

T DRILL_3 D 1 F 0.1mm/rev S 2000 rev/min

• Set the following parameters:

Shank/tip Shank
Z1 5 inc
DT 0s

•
11. Position pattern Positions
• Select via soft keys >

• Set the following parameters:

Full/pitch circle Full circle

Z0 0 abs
X0 0 abs
Y0 0 abs
α0 –90°
R 5
N 3
Positioning Linear

•
12. Swiveling Return swivel head or swivel table back to original position:
Transfor- Swiveling
• Select via soft keys mations > >

• Example of technological data:

T 0 D 1

• Set the following parameters:

Retraction Yes
Swiveling Yes
Transformation New
X0 0
Y0 0
Z0 0
Swiveling Axial

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition 8-349
 8 8
Examples 11.02
8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

X 0°
Y 0°
Z 0°
X1 0
Y1 0
Z1 0
Direction -

•
Result • ShopMill program representation

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

8-350 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix

Appendix

A Abbreviations...........................................................................................................A-352

B References..............................................................................................................A-355

C Index .......................................................................................................................A-369

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-351
 A A
Appendix 11.02
Abbreviations

A Abbreviations

ABS Absolute dimension

CNC Computerized Numerical Control

COM Communication
Component of the numerical control that executes and coordinates the
communication

D Edge

DIN German Industry Standard

DRF Differential Resolver Function: This function in combination with an

electronic handwheel generates an incremental work offset in
automatic mode.

DRY Dry Run Feedrate

F Feed

GUD Global User Data

HW Hardware

INC Increment: Incremental dimension

INI Initializing Data

LED Light Emitting Diode

M01 M function: Programmed stop

M17 M function: Subroutine end

MCS Machine (Machine coordinate system)

MD Machine Data

MDI Manual Data Input (previously MDA: Manual Data Automatic)

MLFB Machine-readable product designation

MPF Main Program File

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-352 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
Abbreviations

NC Numerical Control
The numerical control comprises the following components NCK, PLC,
PCU and COM.

NCK Numerical Control Kernel: Component of the numerical control that

executes programs and primarily coordinates the motions for the
machine tool.

OP Operator Panel

PC Personal Computer

PCU Personal Computer Unit: Component of the NC allowing

communication between operator and machine.

PLC Programmable Logic Controller: Component of the NC for processing

control logics of machine tool.

PRT Program Test

REF Reference point approach function

REPOS Reposition function

ROV Rapid override function

RS-232 Serial Interface

S Spindle speed

SBL Single Block

SI Safety Integrated

SK Soft key

SKP Skip block

SPF Subprogram File

SW Software

T Tool

TMZ Tool Magazine Zero

V Cutting rate

WCS Work (Workpiece Coordinate System)

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-353
 A A
Appendix 11.02
Abbreviations

WO Work offset

WPD Workpiece Directory

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-354 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
References

B References

General Documentation

/BU/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802S, C, D

Ordering Information
Catalog NC 60
Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A9-7600

/IKPI/ Catalog IK PI • 2000

Industrial Communication and Field Devices
Order No. of boud edition: E86060-K6710-A101-A9
Order No. of single-sheet edition: E86060-K6710-A100-A9

/ST7/ SIMATIC
SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Controllers
Catalog ST 70
Order No.: E86060-K4670-A111-A3

/Z/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE

Connections & System Components
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-A8-7600

Electronic Documentation

/CD1/ The SINUMERIK System

DOC ON CD (11.02 Edition)
(includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802 and
SIMODRIVE publications)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG3

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-355
 A A
Appendix 11.02
References

User Documentation

/AUK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

AutoTurn Short Operating Guide (09.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA30-0BP2

/AUP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (02.02 Edition)
Operator's Guide
Programming/Setup
Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA40-0BP3

/BA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Operator's Guide MMC (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA00-0BP0

/BAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Operator's Guide HMI Advanced (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF00-0BP2

/BEM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Operator's Guide HMI Embedded (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC00-0BP2

/BAH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Operator's Guide HT 6 (06.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-0AD60-0BP2

/BAK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Short Operating Guide (02.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA10-0BP0

/BAM/ SINUMERIK 810D/840D

Operation/Programming ManualTurn (08.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD00-0BP0

/BAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Operation/Programming ShopMill (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD10-0AB0

/BAT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Operation/Programming ShopTurn (03.03 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP2

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-356 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
References

/BNM/ SINUMERIK 840D840Di//810D

User's Guide Measuring Cycles (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA70-0BP2

/CAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Operator's Guide CAD-Reader (03.02 Edition)
Order No.: (ist Bestandteil der Online-Hilfe)

/DA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Diagnostics Guide (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA20-0BP3

/KAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Short Guide ManualTurn (04.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD40-0BP0

/KAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Short Guide ShopMill (04.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD30-0BP0

/KAT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Short Guide ShopTurn (07.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF20-0BP0

/PG/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide Fundamentals (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB00-0BP2

/PGA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide Advanced (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB10-0BP2

/PGK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Short Guide Programmierung (02.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB30-0BP1

/PGM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide ISO Milling (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC20-0BP2

/PGT/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide ISO Turning (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC10-0BP2

/PGZ/ SINUMERIK 840D840Di//810D

Programming Guide Cycles (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB40-0BP2

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-357
 A A
Appendix 11.02
References

/PI/ PCIN 4.4

Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module
Order No.: 6FX2 060-4AA00-4XB0 (English, French, German)
Order from: WK Fürth

/SYI/ SINUMERIK 840Di

System Overview (02.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AE40-0BP0

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-358 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
References

Manufacturer/Service Documentation
a) Lists
/LIS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
SIMODRIVE 611D
Lists (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB70-0BP3

b) Hardware
/BH/ SINUMERIK 840D840Di//810D
Operator Components Manual (HW) (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP2

/BHA/ SIMODRIVE Sensor

Absolute Encoder with PROFIBUS DP
User's Guide (HW) (02.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB10-0YP1

/EMV/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE

EMC Installation Guideline (06.99 Edition)
Planning Guide (HW)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AD30-0BP1

/GHA/ ADI4 - Analog Drive Interface for 4 Axes (09.02 Edition)

Equipment Manual
Order No.: 6FC5 297-0BA01-0BP0

/PHC/ SINUMERIK 810D

Configuring Manual (HW) (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD10-0AB0

/PHD/ SINUMERIK 840D

Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.4 (HW) (10.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC10-0BP2

/PMH/ SIMODRIVE Sensor

Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H
Configuring/Installation Guide (HW) (07.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP1

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-359
 A A
Appendix 11.02
References

c) Software
/FB1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
Description of Functions, Basic Machine (Part 1) (11.02 Edition)
(the various manuals are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC20-0BP2

A2 Various Interface Signals

A3 Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones
B1 Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead
B2 Acceleration
D1 Diagnostic Tools
D2 Interactive Programming
F1 Travel to Fixed Stop
G2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control
H2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC
K1 Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation Mode
K2 Coordinate Systems, Axis Types, Axis Configurations,
Actual-Value System for Workpiece, External Zero Offset
K4 Communication
N2 EMERGENCY STOP
P1 Transverse Axes
P3 Basic PLC Program
R1 Reference Point Approach
S1 Spindles
V1 Feeds
W1 Tool Compensation

/FB2/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Description of Functions, Extended Functions (11.02 Edition)
(Part 2)
including FM-NC: Turning, Stepping Motor
(the various manuals are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC30-0BP2

A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os

B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs
B4 Operation via PG/PC
F3 Remote Diagnostics
H1 Jog with/without Handwheel
K3 Compensations
K5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement
L1 FM-NC Local Bus
M1 Kinematic Transformation
M5 Measurements
N3 Software Cams, Position Switching Signals
N4 Punching and Nibbling
P2 Positioning Axes

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-360 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
References

P5 Oscillation
R2 Rotary Axes
S3 Synchronous Spindles
S5 Synchronized Actions (SW 3 and lower, higher /FBSY/)
S6 Stepper Motor Control
S7 Memory Configuration
T1 Indexing Axes
W3 Tool Change
W4 Grinding

/FB3/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Description of Functions Special Functions (Part 3) (11.02 Edition)
(the various manuals are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC80-0BP2

F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation

G1 Gantry Axes
G3 Cycle Times
K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring
M3 Coupled Axes and ESR (previously Coupled Motion and
Master/Slave Couplings)
S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding
T3 Tangential Control
TE0 Installation and Activation of Compile Cycles
TE1 Clearance Control
TE2 Analog Axis
TE3 Speed/Torque Coupling Master-Slave
TE4 Transformation Package Handling
TE5 Setpoint Exchange
TE6 MCS Coupling
TE7 Retrace Support
TE8 Unclocked Path-Synchronous Switching Signal Output
V2 Preprocessing
W3 3D Tool Radius Compensation

/FBA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions, Drive Functions (11.02 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA80-0BP9

DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions

DD1 Diagnostic Functions
DD2 Speed Control Loop
DE1 Extended Drive Functions
DF1 Enable Commands
DG1 Encoder Parameterization
DL1 Linear Motor MD

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-361
 A A
Appendix 11.02
References

DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and Controller Data

DS1 Current Control Loop
DÜ1 Monitors/Limitations

/FBAN/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 DIGITAL

Description of Functions ANA-MODULE (02.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB80-0BP0

/FBD/ SINUMERIK 840D

Description of Functions Digitizing (07.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AC50-0BP0

DI1 Start-Up
DI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan)
DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser)
DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)

/FBDN/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

IT Solutions
NC Data Management Server (DNC NT-2000)
Description of Functions (01.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE50-0BP2

/FBDT/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

IT-Solutions
SinDNC Data Transfer via Network
Description of Functions (09.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE70-0BP0

/FBFA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK (11.02 Edition)
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE10-0BP3

/FBFE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions Remote Diagnostics (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AF00-0BP2

/FBH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

HMI Programming Package (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: (is part of the SW delivery)

Part 1 User's Guide

Part 2 Description of Functions

/FBHLA/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital

Description of Functions HLA Module (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB60-0BP2

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-362 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
References

/FBMA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions ManualTurn (08.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD50-0BP2
/FBO/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Configuring of OP 030 Operator Interface (09.01 Edition)
Description of Functions
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC40-0BP0

BA Operator's Guide
EU Development Environment (Configuring Package)
PS Online only: Configuring Syntax (Configuring Package)
PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface
IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration

/FBP/ SINUMERIK 840D

Description of Functions C-PLC Programming (03.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB60-0BP0

/FBR/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

IT-Solutions
Computer Link (SinCOM) (09.01 Edition)
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD60-0BP0

NFL Host Computer Interface

NPL PLC/NCK Interface

/FBSI/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE

Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (09.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB80-0BP1

/FBSP SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions ShopMill (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP1

/FBST/ SIMATIC
FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP (01.01 Edition)
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA70-0YP4

/FBSY/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions Synchronaktionen (10.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD40-0BP2

/FBT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions ShopTurn (03.03 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD70-0BP2

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-363
 A A
Appendix 11.02
References

/FBTC/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

IT-Solutions
SINUMERIK Tool Data Communication SinTDC (01.02 Edition)
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AF30-0BP0

/FBTD/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

IT-Solutions
Tool Information System (SinTDI) with Online Help (02.01 Edition)
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE00-0BP0

/FBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E

Closed-Loop Control Component for (02.02 Edition)
Speed Control and Positioning
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB20-0BP5

/FBW/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions Tool Management (10.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC60-0BP1

/FBWI/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Description of Functions WinTPM (02.02 Edition)
Order No.: This document is part of the software

/HBA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Manual @Event (03.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6AU1900-0CL20-0AA0

/HBI/ SINUMERIK 840Di

Manual (09.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE60-0BP1

/INC/ SINUMERIK 840D840Di//810D

Commissioning Tool SINUMERIK SinuCOM NC (02.02 Edition)
System Description
Order No.: (an integral part of the online Help for the start-up tool)

/PAP/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (02.99 Edition)

Absolute Encoder with PROFIBUS DP
User's Guide
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP1

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-364 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
References

/PFK/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide 1FT5/1FT6/1FK6 Motors (12.01 Edition)
AC Servo Motors for Feedrate and
Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC20-0BP0

/PJE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

HMI Embedded Configuring Package (08.01 Edition)
Description of Functions: Software Update, Configuration,
Installation
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6EA10-0BP0
(the document PS Configuring Syntax is supplied with the software
and available as a pdf file)

/PJFE/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide (09.01 Edition)
Built-In Synchronous Motors 1FE1
Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC00-0BP1

/PJLM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Linear Motors 1FN1, 1FN3 (11.01 Edition)
ALL General Information about Linear Motors
1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase Linear Motor
1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase Linear Motor
CON Connections
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB70-0BP2

/PJM/ SIMODRIVE
Plannig Guide Motors
Three-Phase AC Motors for Feed and (11.00 Edition)
Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA20-0BP5

/PJTM/ SIMODRIVE
Plannig Guide (08.02 Edition)
Integrated Torque Motors 1FW6
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AD00-0BP0

/PJU/ SIMODRIVE 611

Plannig Guide Inverters (08.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA00-0BP6

PMS SIMODRIVE
Plannig Guide ECO Motor Spindle (04.02 Edition)
for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AD04-0BP0

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-365
 A A
Appendix 11.02
References

/POS1/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A

User's Guide (08.02 Edition)
Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP
Order No.: 6SN2 197-0AA00-0BP3

/POS2/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A

Installation Instructions (enclosed with POSMO A)

/POS3/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA (08.02 Edition)

Operator's Guide
Distributed Servo Drive Systems
Order No.: 6SN2 197-0AA20-0BP3

/PPH/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide 1PH2/1PH4/1PH7 Motors (12.01 Edition)
AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC60-0BP0

/PPM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Hollow-Shaft Motors (10.01 Edition)
Hollow-Shaft Motors for Main Spindle Drives
1PM4 and 1PM6
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AD03-0BP0

/S7H/ SIMATIC S7-300

- Manual: CPU Data (Hardware) (10.98 Edition)
- Reference Manual: Module Data
Order No.: 6ES7 398-8AA03-8AA0

/S7HT/ SIMATIC S7-300

Manual STEP 7, Fundamentals, V. 3.1 (03.97 Edition)
Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AA0

/S7HR/ SIMATIC S7-300

Manual STEP7, Reference Manuals, V3.1 (03.97 Edition)
Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AR0

/S7S/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 353 Stepper Drive Positioning Module (04.97 Edition)
Order in conjunction with configuring package

/S7L/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo Drive (04.97 Edition)
Order together with configuring package

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-366 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
References

/S7M/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo Drive (04.97 Edition)
Order together with configuring package

/SP/ SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D

SimoPro 3.1
Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives
Order No.: 6SC6 111-6PC00-0AA❏
Order from: WK Fürth

d) Installation
and Start-Up
/IAA/ SIMODRIVE 611A
Installation and Start-Up Guide (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN 1197-0AA60-0BP6

/IAC/ SINUMERIK 810D

Installation and Start-Up Guide (03.02 Edition)
(including description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up
software)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AD20-0BP0

/IAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D

Installation and Start-Up Guide (11.02 Edition)
(including description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AB10-0BP2

/IAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide (11.02 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP2

AE1 Updates/Options
BE1 Expand the operator interface
HE1 Online Help
IM2 Start-Up HMI Embedded
IM4 Start-Up HMI Advanced
TX1 Setting Foreign Language Texts

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-367
 A A
Appendix 11.02
References

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-368 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
Index

C Index

3 Change the tool type 2-115

3D representation 5-261 Change view 5-261
3D tools 2-105 Channel status 1-31
3-plane view 5-259 Channel status messages 1-31
A Chip breaking 3-177
Absolute dimension 1-44 Circle 3-149
Absolute dimensioning 3-129 Polar 3-172
Additional commands 3-145 With known center point 3-167
Alarms With known radius 3-168
Cycles 7-302 Circular pocket 3-204
ShopMill 7-310 Circular spigot 3-209
ShopMill 7-308 Circumferential slot 3-214
Allowance 3-142 CNC ISO operation 2-125
Alternat. 3-137 Coarse offset 2-120
Angle for tapered milling tools 2-106 Complete machining 3-137
Annular slot 3-214 Contour
Approach a cycle 3-137 Close 3-148
Approach mode 3-153 copy 3-140
Approach strategy 3-154 New 3-144
Arithmetic parameters 4-252 rename 3-141
Automatic mode 2-86 Contour element 3-148
Auxiliary function 2-87 change 3-148
Axes 3-129 delete 3-148
Axis Contour milling 3-143
Position 2-83 Coolant 2-111, 3-239
Axis key 1-25 Coordinate system
B Rectangular 1-42
Basic angle of rotation 3-190 Coordinate transformation 2-119
Basic block display 2-99 define 3-228
Basic offset 2-62 Corner point 3-134
Blank 3-134 Create tool wear data 2-112
Blank dimensions 5-257 Cutter radius compensation 3-130
Block search 2-91 Cutting edge 3-142
Boring 3-179 Cutting plane 5-262
Broken-line graphics 1-37 Cutting rate 3-130, 3-142
C Cycle support 4-244
Calibrate electronic measuring tool 2-74 Cylinder peripheral surface transformation 3-147,
Calibrate measuring tool 2-74 3-231
Centering 3-157 D
Centering 3-175 D 3-142
Center-point path 3-154 Deep-hole drilling 3-177
Chaining 3-132 Define the starting point 3-144
Chamfer 3-146 Dialog line 1-30

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-369
 A A
Appendix 11.02
Index

Dialog selection 3-147 G

Direction of spindle rotation 3-239 G code 3-145
Directory cut 4-250
Copy 6-274, 6-293 in ShopMill program 3-240
Create 6-272, 6-291 insert 4-250
Delete 6-275, 6-295 search 4-250
Move 6-294 select 4-249
Open 6-266, 6-284 skip 2-94
Rename 6-275, 6-294 G code block
Select 6-266, 6-284 number 4-251
Disable magazine location 2-114 G code editor 4-249
DR 3-142 G code program
Drill and thread milling 3-184 create 4-244
Drilling 3-174, 3-176 execute 4-247
Duplo number 2-102 Execute 6-271, 6-289
E simulate 4-247
Emergency Stop 1-24 G code: 4-250
End 4-251 G function 2-87
Equidistant path 2-110 Gear stage 3-239
Error log 6-279, 6-298 Gear stage 2-60
Example H
Cylinder peripheral surface transformation H function 2-87
8-336 H number 2-102, 4-253
Drilling 3-195 Hard disk 6-289
Face milling 3-199 Helix 3-169
Free contour programming 3-150 Help display 1-39
Polar coordinates 3-173 I
Position pattern for milling 3-217 Inch/metric 3-129
Rectangular pocket 3-203 Inch/metric switchover 1-46
Slot side compensation 8-340 inch/mm 2-61
swiveling 3-237 Increment 2-55
Swiveling 8-344 Incremental dimension 1-44
Thread cutting 3-183 Incremental dimensioning 3-129
Examples 8-322, 8-330, 8-333 Input field 1-40
Execute 2-86 Insert mode 1-41
Execution Insertion 3-201
stop 2-89 Inside contour 3-146
F Inside thread 3-181
Face milling 2-83, 3-197 ISO dialect 2-102, 4-253
Feed status 1-31 J
Feedrate 3-131, 3-136 Jog 1-24
Feedrate override 1-26 K
Fine offset 2-120 Keys 1-22
Finish 3-162 operation 1-32
Finishing 2-83, 3-137 Keyswitch 1-27
Fixed location 2-113 L
Floppy disk 6-271 Lateral offset 2-78, 3-221
Floppy disk drive 6-289 Length allowance 2-112
Free contour programming 3-143, 3-144

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-370 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
Index

Line 3-165 N
Polar 3-171 Network drive 6-271, 6-289
Location assignment 2-103 No. of loadings 2-113
Location number 2-102 Number of teeth 2-111
Longitudinal offset 2-78, 3-221 O
Longitudinal slot 3-212 Obstacle 3-193
M Offset values 2-110
M function 2-87 Online help 4-244
M functions 3-239 Operation 1-32
Machine control panel 1-24 Operator panel
Machine coordinate system 1-47 keys 1-22
Machining OP 010 1-19
start 2-89 OP 010C 1-20
stop 2-89 OP 010S 1-20
Machining direction 3-135 OP 012 1-21
Machining feedrate 3-131 OP 015 1-21
Machining plan 1-37 Operator panels 1-19
Machining plane 2-60 Outside contour 3-145
Magazine 2-114 Outside thread 3-181
Magazine list 2-114 P
Main program 3-223 Parameter
Manual mode 2-55, 2-82 accept 1-41
Manual mode 2-55 calculate 1-41
Manual tools 2-107 delete 1-41
Marker 3-224 edit 1-41
MCS/WCS 1-47 Parameter screen 1-38
MDI mode 2-85 Parameters 3-147
Measure select 1-40
workpiece zero 2-64, 3-219 setting 1-40
Measure corner 2-66, 2-70 Password 1-27
Measure hole 2-67, 2-72 Path milling 3-143, 3-153
Measure spigot 2-68, 2-73 Plan view 5-258
Measurements 3-219 Plane designations 1-42
Measuring Pocket calculator 1-45
tools 2-76 Pocket with islands 3-143, 3-159, 3-162
Measuring edge 2-65, 2-69 Polar coordinates 1-43, 3-170
Measuring probe Pole 3-170
calibrate 3-222 Position
Calibrate 2-81 Freely programmable 3-187
Messages Position
Cycles 7-307 Repeat 3-194
Metric/inch 3-129 Position pattern
Metric/inch switchover 1-46 Full circle 3-190
Milling 3-197 Line 3-188
Mini handheld unit 1-28 Matrix 3-189
Mirroring 3-229 Milling 3-216
Miscellaneous functions 3-239 Pitch circle 3-192
mm/inch 2-61 Position value 2-62
Multiple clamping 6-268, 6-286 Positioning 3-186

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-371
 A A
Appendix 11.02
Index

Positioning motions 3-164 Radius 3-146

Power ON 7-309 Rapid traverse 2-83
Prewarning limit 2-113 Rapid traverse override 1-26
Probe 2-78 Read in tool data 6-279, 6-298
Program Read in zero point data 6-279, 6-298
abort 2-89 Reaming 3-176
Copy 6-274, 6-293 Reapproach contour 2-90
Correct 2-100 Recompile 4-245, 4-246
Create 6-272, 6-291 Rectangular pocket 3-200
Delete 6-275, 6-295 Rectangular spigot 3-207
Execute 6-268, 6-276, 6-285 Reference point approach 2-52
Execute a trial run 2-98 Remote diagnosis 2-126
Interrupt 2-90 Remove residual material 3-144
Load 6-289 Repeat 3-224
Move 6-294 Replacement tool 2-107
new 3-133 Repos 2-90
Read in 6-278, 6-297 Reset 1-24
Read out 6-277, 6-296 Residual material 3-160
Rename 6-275, 6-294 Retract from contour 2-90
Select for execution 2-88 Retraction mode 3-153
Select several 6-273, 6-292 Retraction strategy 3-154
start 2-89 Retraction withposition patterns 3-135
stop 2-89 Return plane 2-82, 3-134
Program block 3-132 Right-hand rule 1-42
change 3-138 Rotation 3-228
copy 3-140 Rough cut 3-159
cut 3-140 Rough drilling 3-156, 3-157
insert 3-140 Rough-drilling 3-143
New 3-136 Roughing 2-83, 3-137
number 3-141 Rounding radius 2-106
repeat 3-224 RS-232 interface 6-276, 6-296
search 3-141 S
select 3-140 S 3-142
Program control 1-31 S1 1-30
Program editor 3-139 S2 1-30
Program header 3-132, 3-133 S3 1-30
Program management Safety clearance 2-82, 3-134
PCU 20 6-265 Safety Integrated 2-54
PCU 50 6-282 Save tool data 6-279, 6-298
Program Manager 6-265, 6-282 Save zero point data 6-279, 6-298
Program name 3-133 Scale 2-123
Program structure 3-132 Scaling 3-229
Program: 2-95, 6-267, 6-284, 6-288 Screen keys 1-31
Programmed stop 2-94, 3-239 Search
Programming graphic 1-37, 3-146 block 2-92
Protection levels 1-27 text 2-93
Punched tape/ISO format 4-253 Select the alarm overview 7-309
R Select the message overview 7-309
Radii allowance 2-112 Settings

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-372 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 A A
11.02 Appendix
Index

change 3-226 T
Setup feedrate 2-55 T 3-142
ShopMill 1-18 Tangent 3-147
select 2-125 Tapping 3-180
ShopMill Open 2-126 TEMP 6-275, 6-295
ShopMill program 3-129 Test socket 2-77
Simulation 5-256 Thread cutting 3-181
Abort 5-257 Three-dimensional representation 5-261
Start 5-256 Tool
Simultaneous recording Change 2-56
before machining 2-96 create new 2-105
during machining 2-97 Delete 2-115
Single block 2-98 Disable 2-113
Deselect 2-98 Load 2-116
fine 2-98 Load in magazine 2-58
Skip 2-94 load new 2-57
Slot side compensation 3-231 measure 3-221
Soft key Measure 2-76, 2-78
Accept 1-35 multiple cutting edges 2-106
Back 1-35 Oversized 2-113
Cancel 1-35 Program 3-129
OK 1-35 programming 3-142
operation 1-32 Sort 2-118
Solid machine 3-159 Unload 2-117
Special function Tool axis 2-60
Tool 2-111 Tool length compensation 2-109, 3-129
Special functions 2-60 Tool life 2-113
Spindle Tool list 2-101
Position 2-59 Tool magazine 2-103
start 2-59 Tool monitoring 2-113
stop 2-59 Tool name 2-107
Spindle direction of rotation 2-111 Tool offset 2-108
Spindle override 1-26 Tool offsets 2-101
Spindle position 3-239 Tool radius compensation 2-109, 3-130
Spindle speed 2-59, 3-142 Tool status 2-114
Spindle speed 3-130 Tool type 2-102
Spindle status 1-31 Tool wear list 2-103
Start 4-251 Tools 2-101
Stock removal 3-177 Total offset 2-119
Stop 3-239 Transition element 3-146
Straight line 3-149 Translation 3-228
radius compensation 3-165 Traverse at rapid rate 3-131
Submode 1-31 Traverse axes 2-55
Subroutine 3-223 U
Support for measuring cycles 4-244 Unit of measurement 3-134
Switch OFF 2-51 Unit selection 1-41
Switch ON 2-51 User confirmation 2-54
Swiveling 3-234 User data 7-318
User interface 1-30

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition A-373
 A A
Appendix 11.02
Index

V Select 2-124
V 3-142 total 2-119
Variables 7-318 Work offset list 2-122
Version display 7-320 Work offsets
View call 3-227
Change 5-261 Workpiece coordinate system 1-47
Update 5-262 Workpiece zero
W automatic measurement 2-69
WCS/MCS 1-47 manual measurement 2-64
Work offset 2-119, 2-124 measure 2-64, 3-219
basic 2-119 Workstation 1-19
coordinate transformation 2-119 Z
definition 2-121 Zoom 5-260
Deselect 2-124

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

A-374 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) - 11.02 Edition
 To Suggestions

SIEMENS AG
Corrections
A&D MC BMS for Publication/Manual:

P.O. Box 3180

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
D-91050 Erlangen, Germany
Tel.: +49 (0) 180 5050 – 222 [Hotline] ShopMill

Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98 – 2176 [Documentation]

Email: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de User Documentation
From Operation/Programming

Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP1

Name Edition: 11.02
Company/Department
Should you come across any printing errors when
Address: reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet.
Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.

Phone: /
Fax: /

Suggestions and/or corrections

 Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation (11.2002)
General Documentation User Documentation

SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/810D 840D/840Di/ Accessories 840D/810D/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/
810D/ FM-NC 810D 810D 810D

Brochure Catalog Catalog AutoTurn Operator’s Guide Diagnostics Operator’s Guide *)

Ordering Info. Accessories – Short Guide – HT 6 Guide *) – Short Guide
NC 60 *) NC-Z – Programming/ – HMI Embedded
Setup – HMI Advanced

User Documentation Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840Di 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840D/840Di/
810D 810D 810D

Program. Guide Operator’s Guide System Overview Configuring Operator Description of Description of
– Short Guide – ManualTurn (HW) *) Components Functions Functions
– Fundamentals *) – Short Guide ManualTurn – 810D (HW) *) – ManualTurn Synchronized
– Advanced *) – ShopMill – 840D – ShopMill Actions
– Cycles – Short Guide ShopMill – ShopTurn
– Measuring Cycles – ShopTurn
– ISO Turning/Milling – Short Guide ShopTurn
Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
611D 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840D/810D 840D/810D
840D/810D 810D 810D

Description of Description of Description of Configuring Kit Description of IT Solutions

Functions Functions Functions HMI Embedded Functions – Computer Link
Drive Functions *) – Basic Machine *) Tool Manage- Operator Interface – Tool Data Information System
– Extended Functions ment OP 030 – NC Data Management
– Special Functions – NC Data Transfer
– Tool Data Communication

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIROTEC
840D 840D/840Di 840D 840D
810D 611D 611D
611D

Description of Description of Installation & Lists *) Description of Description of Functions EMC

Functions Functions Start-Up Guide *) Functions – Hydraulics Module Guidelines
SINUMERIK Digitizing – 810D Linear Motor – Analog Module
Safety Integrated – 840D/611D
– HMI Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Electronic Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

SIMODRIVE 840Di
840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840D/840Di/
840D/840Di/ 810D 810D
810D
611, Motors

DOC ON CD *) Description of Manual Description of Manual

The SINUMERIK System Functions (HW + Installation Functions @ Event
ISO Dialects for and Start-Up) Remote Diagnosis
SINUMERIK
*) These documents are a minimum requirement
Siemens AG
Automation & Drives
Motion Control Systems
P. O. Box 3180, D – 91050 Erlangen © Siemens AG 2002
Subject to change without prior notice.
Germany Order No. 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP1

www.ad.siemens.de Printed in Germany